262
Studio Developer's Guide v12.0.0 CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager

CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Studio Developer's Guide

v12.0.0

CA Clarity™ Project & Portfolio

Manager

Page 2: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the

"Documentation") are for your informational purposes only and are subject to change or withdrawal by CA at any

time.

This Documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed, modified or duplicated, in whole or in

part, without the prior written consent of CA. This Documentation is confidential and proprietary information of CA

and may not be used or disclosed by you except as may be permitted in a separate confidentiality agreement

between you and CA.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if you are a licensed user of the software product(s) addressed in the

Documentation, you may print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation for internal use by you and

your employees in connection with that software, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to

each reproduced copy.

The right to print copies of the Documentation is limited to the period during which the applicable license for such

software remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it is your responsibility to

certify in writing to CA that all copies and partial copies of the Documentation have been returned to CA or

destroyed.

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, CA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENTATION "AS IS" WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CA BE LIABLE TO THE END

USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, FROM THE USE OF THIS

DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, LOST INVESTMENT, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION, GOODWILL, OR LOST DATA, EVEN IF CA IS EXPRESSLY ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE.

The use of any software product referenced in the Documentation is governed by the applicable license agreement

and is not modified in any way by the terms of this notice.

The manufacturer of this Documentation is CA.

Provided with "Restricted Rights." Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the

restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 12.212, 52.227-14, and 52.227-19(c)(1) - (2) and DFARS Section

252.227-7014(b)(3), as applicable, or their successors.

Copyright © 2009 CA. All rights reserved. All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein

belong to their respective companies.

Page 3: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Contact CA

Contact Technical Support

For your convenience, CA provides one site where you can access the

information you need for your Home Office, Small Business, and Enterprise CA

products. At http://ca.com/support, you can access the following:

■ Online and telephone contact information for technical assistance and

customer services

■ Information about user communities and forums

■ Product and documentation downloads

■ CA Support policies and guidelines

■ Other helpful resources appropriate for your product

Provide Feedback

If you have comments or questions about CA product documentation, you can

send a message to [email protected].

If you would like to provide feedback about CA product documentation,

complete our short customer survey, which is also available on the CA Support

website, found at http://ca.com/docs.

Page 4: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits
Page 5: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Contents 5

Contents

Chapter 1: About Studio 11

Studio Features and Benefits .................................................................. 11

Key Features and Benefits ................................................................. 12

How to Get Started with Studio ................................................................ 14

The Studio Process Overview .............................................................. 14

About Data Providers ...................................................................... 16

Important Studio Terms ....................................................................... 17

Chapter 2: Partitions 19

Partitions Overview ........................................................................... 19

The Benefits of Using Partitions ............................................................ 19

How Partitioning Works ....................................................................... 20

About Partition Models .................................................................... 21

Partitions and Object Views ................................................................ 22

Portlets and Partitioned Data Providers ..................................................... 22

Access Rights and Partitions ............................................................... 23

How to Work with Partitions ................................................................... 24

How to Create and Use Partitions .............................................................. 24

Create Partition Models .................................................................... 25

Add a Partition to a Partition Model ......................................................... 26

Add Many Partitions to a Partition Model (Quick Create) ..................................... 27

Add Members (Resources) to a Partition .................................................... 28

Select a Partition‘s UI Theme .............................................................. 29

Apply a Partition Model to an Object ........................................................ 29

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 31

About Objects ................................................................................ 32

Process Overview: Working with Objects ....................................................... 34

Data Providers ................................................................................ 34

Objects Data Provider ..................................................................... 35

System Types Data Provider ............................................................... 40

Create Objects ............................................................................... 41

Grant Access to Objects ....................................................................... 42

Object Attributes ............................................................................. 43

Attribute Data Types ...................................................................... 43

How to Add Attributes to Objects ........................................................... 45

Page 6: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

6 Studio Developer's Guide

Calculated Attributes ...................................................................... 73

Autonumber Object Attributes ............................................................. 84

Modify Object Attributes ................................................................... 89

Delete Object Attributes ................................................................... 90

How to Audit Objects .......................................................................... 92

Delete Objects ................................................................................ 94

About Add-Ins ................................................................................ 95

Apply Add-Ins ................................................................................ 95

Views ........................................................................................ 96

Add User-Defined Fields to Views .......................................................... 96

Create Subpages for the Properties View .................................................. 107

Publish Changes to List and Filter Views ................................................... 113

Restore Defaults for an Object's View ..................................................... 115

Restore Defaults for Selected Views ....................................................... 115

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab .................................................... 116

Define and Manage a Custom Property View ............................................... 116

Display Custom Subpage Links on a Tab Using the Custom Property View .................... 120

Links for Pages and Subpages ................................................................ 122

Link from an Object Page to a Subpage .................................................... 123

Link from an Object Attribute to a Web Page ............................................... 123

Link to Properties Pages from External Applications ........................................ 125

Add Image Fields to List Column Views ........................................................ 126

Add Gantt Chart Fields to List Column Views ............................................... 126

Add Image Link Fields to List Column Views................................................ 128

Add Progress Bar Fields to List Column Views .............................................. 129

Change Field Properties ...................................................................... 130

How to Change a Field's Appearance .......................................................... 132

Change Field Labels ...................................................................... 133

Display a Range of Values as a Color or Icon ............................................... 133

Change the Appearance of Properties View Attributes ....................................... 134

Change the Appearance of List Column View Fields ......................................... 136

Change the Appearance of List Filter View Fields ........................................... 139

Display Fields as Bar or Column Graphs ................................................... 141

Menus, Sections, and Links ................................................................... 144

Add Menu Items or Links ................................................................. 144

Change Sections and Links ............................................................... 145

Move Sections and Links .................................................................. 146

Delete Sections or Links .................................................................. 147

Icons ....................................................................................... 147

Stock Icons ................................................................................. 148

Page 7: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Contents 7

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 151

Portlet Overview ............................................................................. 152

Types of Access Rights ....................................................................... 152

Stock Portlets ............................................................................... 155

Graph Portlets ............................................................................... 161

Data Providers ........................................................................... 161

Graph Portlet Types ...................................................................... 162

Create Graph Portlets .................................................................... 164

Determine Graph Portlet Appearance ...................................................... 166

Determine Graph Portlet Data to Display .................................................. 171

Change Graph Portlets ................................................................... 173

Delete Graph Portlets .................................................................... 173

Grid Portlets ................................................................................. 174

Access Rights and Grid Portlets ........................................................... 174

Grid Portlet Aggregation, Comparison, and Variance Options ................................ 174

Hierarchical Grid Portlets ................................................................. 175

Things to Consider When Creating Grid Portlets ............................................ 175

Create Grid Portlets ...................................................................... 176

Determine the Layout of Grid Portlets ..................................................... 178

Change Grid Portlets ..................................................................... 180

Delete Grid Portlets ...................................................................... 181

HTML Text Portlets ........................................................................... 181

Create HTML Portlets ..................................................................... 182

Change HTML Portlets .................................................................... 183

Delete HTML Portlets ..................................................................... 184

Filter Portlets ................................................................................ 185

Filter Precedence ......................................................................... 186

Scope of Filter Portlets ................................................................... 187

Filter Persistence ......................................................................... 187

How to Set Up Filter Portlets .............................................................. 188

Create Filter Portlets ..................................................................... 188

Field Data Types for Adding to Filter Portlets ............................................... 189

View the List of Portlet Pages for Filter Portlets ............................................. 201

Determine the Layout of Fields on Filter Portlets ........................................... 201

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content ............................................................. 202

Create Portlet Pages ..................................................................... 203

Add Filter Portlets to Portlet Pages ........................................................ 206

Delete Portlet Pages ...................................................................... 208

Publish Changes to Portlets ................................................................... 209

Access to Portlets and Pages ................................................................. 209

Restrict Access to Portlets or Pages ....................................................... 210

User Configuration Restrictions of Portlets ................................................. 211

Page 8: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

8 Studio Developer's Guide

Configurable User Actions ................................................................ 213

Delete Filter Portlets ......................................................................... 217

Chapter 5: UI Themes 219

Select UI Themes ............................................................................ 220

Create Custom UI Themes .................................................................... 221

Change the CA Clarity PPM Login Image ....................................................... 224

Change the Application Logo Image ........................................................... 224

Change the Background Tiling Image ......................................................... 225

Change Tab and Section Styles ............................................................... 226

Customize Graphs ........................................................................... 228

Customize the Column Header in the Calendar ................................................. 231

Distribute Custom Themes to Servers in the Cluster ............................................ 231

Register New Themes ........................................................................ 232

Chapter 6: NSQL 233

About NSQL Queries ......................................................................... 233

The NSQL Syntax ........................................................................ 233

NSQL Constructs ......................................................................... 236

User-Defined Constructs .................................................................. 238

Advanced NSQL Constructs ............................................................... 242

About Queries ............................................................................... 244

Create Queries ........................................................................... 245

Change Queries .......................................................................... 246

Delete Queries ........................................................................... 247

About Lookups ............................................................................... 247

Browse-only Construct for Dynamic Query Lookups ........................................ 248

Hierarchical Queries .......................................................................... 249

Filtering in Hierarchical Queries ........................................................... 249

NSQL Troubleshooting and Tips ............................................................... 250

Chapter 7: CA Clarity PPM Tables 251

Introduction ................................................................................. 251

Table Prefixes ............................................................................... 251

The Core CA Clarity PPM Tables ............................................................... 252

Project Tables ............................................................................... 253

Resource Tables ............................................................................. 254

Time Slice Tables ............................................................................ 254

Link Time Slice Tables .................................................................... 255

Link Time Slice Queries to PRAssignment .................................................. 256

Timesheet Tables ............................................................................ 256

Page 9: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Contents 9

Timesheet Reporting Considerations ....................................................... 257

Adjustment Timesheets .................................................................. 257

The Datamart Tables ......................................................................... 258

XDM Forms Tables ........................................................................... 258

Index 259

Page 10: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits
Page 11: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 1: About Studio 11

Chapter 1: About Studio

This section contains the following topics:

Studio Features and Benefits (see page 11)

How to Get Started with Studio (see page 14)

Important Studio Terms (see page 17)

Studio Features and Benefits

Studio is the interface to the PowerMods™ framework that you can use to

configure CA Clarity PPM. Use Studio to tailor your CA Clarity PPM system and

deploy local configurations and personalized user interfaces. With Studio,

organizations and individuals can create a work environment that delivers

information in meaningful ways.

Studio‘s point-and-click configuration empowers you to create and deploy

portals, dashboards, menus, and business objects that adapt to your business

process—not the other way around. Users can personalize their dashboards by

choosing which portlets to show or hide and where to show them on a page.

Studio:

■ Delivers real-time information to the users who need it most.

■ Allows you to personalize individual user environments with user-defined

content and graphics.

■ Reduces training requirements and speeds new user adoption by offering

tailored menus, and pages and views that use familiar language and

processes.

■ Allows you to tailor portfolio, project, resource, and idea business objects

without specialized programming skills using PowerMods.

■ Provides partitions that facilitate local management with global governance

while supporting multiple local configurations in a single application

instance.

You can propagate the fields and objects you create to CA Clarity PPM

interfaces and the CA Clarity PPM XML Open Gateway (XOG). Unlike most

configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward

to future versions of the product.

Page 12: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Studio Features and Benefits

12 Studio Developer's Guide

Key Features and Benefits

The following key features and benefits are available to you using Studio.

Features Benefits

User-defined portlets Enables organizations to easily collect, aggregate,

analyze and display important information by using

a combination of PowerMods and portlets. Through a

completely point-and-click user interface, CA Clarity

PPM administrators can create fields, deploy them in

forms on specific pages, and build portlets to

graphically communicate the information collected.

Point-and-click

portlet construction

Delivers over 40 stock and an unlimited number of

user-defined portlets that display graphs, tables,

and HTML content. These portlets reflect the user‘s

access rights and filter settings and allow them to

access and drill into information in a single,

consolidated view.

Multiple display types Displays graphical information in grids or bar,

bubble, column, funnel, line, pie, and scatter

graphs.

Drill-down graphs Allows administrators to define links that provide

users access to underlying data and specific

instances of objects.

Data filters Filter data on any number of predefined,

configurable parameters.

Precision Security™ Reduces administration costs by providing built-in

organizational breakdown structure (OBS) security.

Once access rights for viewing information are

assigned through a configurable, flexible hierarchy,

users see only the information for which they have

access. Portlets automatically generate graphs and

tables based on the privileges of the current user.

Partitions Supports distributed and diverse organizations by

allowing local configurations within a single global

instance of CA Clarity PPM. Each partition can be

configured with its own fields, forms, processes and

branding.

User-defined objects Add new business objects to CA Clarity PPM and

then configure them with fields, forms, processes,

and portlets.

Attachments Allows users to provide document and other types of

attachments for any standard or user-defined

Page 13: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 1: About Studio 13

Features Benefits

business object.

Centralized field

control

Simplifies administration by centralizing the

management of all user-defined fields within Studio.

User-defined fields are automatically deployed to the

user interface, to the process engine, to

OpenWorkbench, to Microsoft Project, and to the

XOG (XML Open Gateway).

User interface

configuration

Provides a consistent user interface across

applications by allowing organizations to configure

CA Clarity PPM to display colors, logos, menus and

pages with a specified corporate look and feel.

New dashboard page

development

Easily extends the capabilities of CA Clarity PPM by

creating new pages that organize and display

information in useful ways for the business, such as

a Project Management Office News page, an

Executive Dashboard, and a Program Issues

Tracking work space.

Menu manager Reduces training and support costs by organizing

the CA Clarity PPM menu navigation to match the

company‘s terms and processes.

View All During object creation, you can enable a feature to

allow all instances of this object and its subobjects

on one properties page.

Third-level object

hierarchy

Create a hierarchy of up to three levels of

user-defined objects that inherit properties from

higher level objects.

Large string attribute Create string objects of any length (subject to

limitations of your database).

Export to XML Export objects in XML format.

Add-Ins Apply add-ins to import a collection of content

(pages, portlets, queries, project templates, roles,

etc.) as a single entity.

Configurable action

items

Configure and add your own status attributes to

action items.

Page 14: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Get Started with Studio

14 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Get Started with Studio

To use Studio, you should have the following:

■ The Studio module installed and have a valid license for it.

■ Some knowledge of SQL to set up and manage the data you will use in

Studio.

■ Studio access rights (available only with a valid Studio license). Access to

Studio is controlled via standard access in the Administration Tool and can

be granted for the three components of Studio: menus, pages, and

portlets.

Note: To get started with Studio, launch the CA Clarity PPM Administration

Tool and click the links from the Studio menu.

The Studio Process Overview

This following is a high-level overview of the process you will use to configure

CA Clarity PPM.

Step 1: (Optional) Create Partitions to Control What Users See and Do

With partitions, organizational units can implement and see CA Clarity PPM

(pages, processes, user interface themes) in different ways. Partitions allow

you to deploy and support different fields, forms, processes, methodologies,

and branding but also to control content access rights within your organization.

The System Partition is the default partition. If you do not create new

partitions, your objects are automatically assigned to the System Partition.

Page 15: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Get Started with Studio

Chapter 1: About Studio 15

Partitions help you govern centrally and manage locally. Local organizational

units can manage their business independently of other organizational units,

yet still adhere to governance requirements.

CA Clarity PPM can look one way for one subsidiary or business unit and one

way for another.

Page 16: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Get Started with Studio

16 Studio Developer's Guide

Step 2: Configure the Interface with User-Defined Objects

Configure and extend business objects to do the following:

■ Create pages with a mix of standard and user-defined fields.

■ Specify validation rules or default values.

■ Create list views with filters and sorts.

■ Create hyperlinks between objects.

Step 3: Create Portlets, Pages, and Menu Items

Facilitate impromptu user reports by creating portlets that contain graphs,

tables, best practices, and documents—all of which are updated and available

in real-time without the need to execute and review reports. Once created, a

portlet‘s presentation is easily manipulated using point-and-click configuration

settings available to administrators and users.

With portlets, users can do the following:

■ Show information in bar, bubble, column, funnel, line, pie, or scatter

graphs.

■ Use Gantt graph and progress bars to visually communicate schedules,

progress, and phase gate status for items such as project tasks, program

durations, and asset and application lifecycles.

■ Leverage out-of-the-box histograms to track resource utilization.

■ Build scorecards by segmenting continuous data into groups and applying

status icons such as red-yellow-green stoplights, approved/unapproved

checkmarks, and leading/steady/trailing performance indicators.

■ Create simple or complex filters to view just the information that is

important.

■ Provide real-time drill-down links from portlet content to business objects

such as portfolio investments, resources, projects, and ideas.

About Data Providers

Studio portlets access information from data providers (objects, queries, and

system types). If you choose to use queries to provide data, you will use NSQL

to create them. CA Clarity PPM‘s data model supports most of the business

objects you need. You can also create constructs that meet your unique

business needs.

Page 17: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Important Studio Terms

Chapter 1: About Studio 17

Important Studio Terms

The following terms are used throughout this book.

Term Definition

Access rights Access rights determine which CA Clarity PPM object

instances you can access and the actions you can take

on them, such as view, edit, or approve.

Attributes

(Fields)

Information that is associated with and may or may not

display on an object‘s pages.

Data provider The source of data used by Studio portlets. Data

providers can be objects, queries, and system types.

Dimension Related data elements in a query. For example

project-related data (project ID, name, start date, etc.)

is considered a single dimension. If a query contains

project and resource data, it contains two dimensions.

Lookup Drop-down lists or browse lists that filter portlet data.

Menu A navigational element of the user interface that

provides links to other pages in the application.

Metrics A value in a dataset, such as booked hours, capacity, or

number of tasks that can be measured.

NSQL An extension of the SQL language that is used to query

data in the CA Clarity PPM database.

Object A resource, document, user, access role, or system

group. These are particular elements or records that you

can attach or associate to an OBS unit. Some of the

object types included in CA Clarity PPM are portfolios,

resources, programs, projects, applications, assets,

products, ideas, other investments, companies, and

users.

OBS Organizational Breakdown Structures; a hierarchical unit

structure used to view the framework of an organization

from both a visual and functional perspective for

aggregation, drill down, resource searching, and rights.

Partition Partitions are local configurations of CA Clarity PPM that

may have their own forms, fields, processes, branding,

and security rules.

Portlet A section of a page that is displayed in CA Clarity PPM.

Portlets can take the form of lists and graphs among

other types.

Query A set of conditions used to retrieve specific information

Page 18: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Important Studio Terms

18 Studio Developer's Guide

Term Definition

from a database.

Resource In CA Clarity PPM, a user who can be assigned to

perform work on a project is a resource. You can

associate resources with skills, primary role, resource

pools and OBS. Resource profiles have properties such

as, resource name, email address, employment type,

manager, available hours per day, target billable rate,

and standard cost. A resource does not have to be a

user although every user is also a resource.

System Partition This is the default partition that exists in each CA Clarity

PPM enterprise installation. Any partitions you create

become children to this partition.

User A CA Clarity PPM user who has access rights and

permissions to use CA Clarity PPM. A CA Clarity PPM user

can participate on a collaboration project and can also be

a resource.

Views An object‘s view determines how information displays on

a page.

Virtual column Columns whose data is not computed when the query is

created (i.e. the data is created in realtime).

Virtual field A field to which CA Clarity PPM can make calls but that

does not physically exist in CA Clarity PPM. It may be a

calculated field, or a field with temporary values

generated by CA Clarity PPM as needed. You cannot

access a virtual field because it does not physically exist.

Page 19: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 2: Partitions 19

Chapter 2: Partitions

This section contains the following topics:

Partitions Overview (see page 19)

How Partitioning Works (see page 20)

How to Work with Partitions (see page 24)

How to Create and Use Partitions (see page 24)

Partitions Overview

If you create new partitions, you should become familiar with the basic

concepts of partitions. If you create even one partition, you will see partition

options as you work objects and portlets. You can simply accept the default

System Partition and all groups and users will have access to your work.

If you do not create new partitions, all the objects you create are automatically

assigned to the System Partition.

The Benefits of Using Partitions

With partitions, you can create local configurations of CA Clarity PPM that have

their own forms, fields, processes, branding, and security rules.

For example, a corporation can consolidate all regional resource, budget, and

program data into a single, global view. A corporation can design and deploy

corporate processes, and provide a clear set of parameters to local

organizations for corporate-wide processes. At the local level—which can be

geographically-based, organizationally-based or a mixture of both—information

can be disseminated to meet local requirements.

You can govern globally by defining fields at the top of your organizational

hierarchy and then make them required for every object instance throughout

CA Clarity PPM.

Manage locally by deploying fields directly to child (descendant) partitions so

that only child partitions must supply values for a field.

Page 20: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How Partitioning Works

20 Studio Developer's Guide

How Partitioning Works

A default System Partition exists in each CA Clarity PPM enterprise installation.

Any partitions you create become children to the System Partition. You can

also create partitions within partitions.

You can set up partitions by department, geography, industry, division, by

legal structures or any other method that makes sense for your organization.

For example, the first level of partitions in a partition model may be

geographical while the second level and subsequent levels may be divisional

partitions.

See the following example where United States and European partitions have

been created to display information that is relevant for each country‘s

operations. CA Clarity PPM pages in each of these partitions may appear

differently to reflect the language and operational differences for each location.

Within the United States and European operations, each has a marketing

organization that has its own partition to reflect the specific needs of those

organizations. The company also has an IT division that uses the default

System Partition to see the total company view.

You can partition the following:

■ Object user-defined attributes (fields)

■ Object views (Properties, List Column, and List Filter)

■ Object links

■ Lookup values

■ User interface (UI) themes

■ Portlet and process data providers (NSQL queries cannot be partitioned)

■ Programs (a list of projects)

Note: Reports and Jobs cannot be partitioned, but you can control access to

them using access rights.

Page 21: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How Partitioning Works

Chapter 2: Partitions 21

When you create an attribute (field) you can choose to make it available for

any ancestor and/or descendant partition, or you can choose to only make it

available to the partition for which it was created. This association is called the

―Partition Association Mode‖. An attribute, however, can only be associated

with one partition at a time.

You can change the partition assignment or partition mode of an attribute at

any time. You should carefully consider the impact your changes may have on

items that reference those attributes. For example, a grid portlet that uses a

user-defined date attribute for Gantt chart columns may no longer be able to

render it because the required attribute is no longer available. A process

instance may fail because it can no longer evaluate or set a certain attribute.

About Partition Models

Partition models organize partitions into a hierarchical model. When you create

partitions, you will use this hierarchical model to assign user-defined attributes

at any level and make them available (or required) at lower level partitions.

This is how you drive governance from the highest level in an organization to

lower levels. It also makes partition administration easier by allowing

lower-level objects to automatically inherit partitioned items.

Partition models are similar to Organizational Breakdown Structures (OBS)

except the following:

■ OBSs are often used to control security and drive reporting, while

■ Partition models control how objects are managed in CA Clarity PPM.

Partition models support resource memberships that are based upon

groups or OBS units and thus are a way of grouping resources.

You can set up multiple partition models, however:

■ A business object can only be assigned to one partition model at a time.

■ As a Studio user, you can be a member of more than one partition within a

partition model. However, when you create new objects, you will be asked

to select the partitions to use. For example, you may be a member of the

United States and European partitions, but you will have to choose which

one to use when you create a project.

■ CA Clarity PPM users can only be members of one partition and thus do not

need to select a partition. Users that are not member of any partition will

see the System Partition (default) views.

Page 22: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How Partitioning Works

22 Studio Developer's Guide

Partitions and Object Views

Object views determine how information displays in CA Clarity PPM. There are

three types of views:

■ Properties views, which display and allow users to enter information about

an object,

■ List Column views, which display instances of an object in rows and

columns, and

■ List Filter views, which help users search for information.

You do not need to define object views for each partition in a partition model.

If a partition has no view, it inherits the view from the nearest ancestor

partition. If no ancestor partitions have views defined, the partition uses

System Partition views.

CA recommends that you first define partitioned views at the top of the

partition model. For example, if you are using a geographical partition model

with ―World‖ at the top and ―United States‖ and ―Europe‖ as descendants, you

should define the World views first (see illustration below.)

If you set up object views for your partition and want to overwrite partitioned

views for descendant partitions, you can restore the default view for an

ancestor partition.

Portlets and Partitioned Data Providers

CA Clarity PPM portlets and processes retrieve their data from data providers

which can be NSQL queries, objects, or system types. Data providers, objects,

portlets and processes can be associated with a partition.

To create a portlet that uses a partitioned data provider, you will create

partition-specific fields for the object and then build a portlet for the object in

the partition.

You can partition static lookup values to associate them with a specific

partition. Users of a partitioned lookup see different values depending on the

partition to which an object instance belongs.

Page 23: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How Partitioning Works

Chapter 2: Partitions 23

Partitioned lookups allow you to govern globally by enforcing the use of

standard options throughout an entire branch of a partition model. You can

manage locally by adding lookup values to meet the unique requirements of a

business unit‘s partition(s).

You can add partitioned values to stock CA Clarity PPM static lookups or to

user-defined static lookups. If an object instance is not partitioned, the lookup

shows only values for the System Partition. You can assign a lookup to a

partition when you create it or you can change an existing lookup and assign it

to a partition.

Access Rights and Partitions

CA Clarity PPM access rights determine what a user can see and functions the

user can perform. Your CA Clarity PPM administrator can grant access rights to

users (resources), groups, OBS units, or globally to all users. Partitioning

affects what objects are exposed to users. Therefore, partitioning and access

rights work together.

If a user has access rights to an instance of a partitioned object, that user can

see partitioned views of that instance—even if the user is not a member of the

partition to which the object instance belongs.

Partitioning affects your ability to do the following:

■ Create partitioned fields

■ Change the layout and appearance of fields for partitioned objects

■ Assign an object instance to a partition

■ Select a UI (user interface) theme

■ Select a default partition

■ Switch partition views

■ See and personalize partitioned List Column and List Filter views

■ Create or see partitioned values for lookups

Page 24: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Work with Partitions

24 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Work with Partitions

The following list provides an overview of the partitioning process:

1. Plan your partitioning implementation on paper so that you can carefully

consider the impact to users.

Note: Once you create partition models, you cannot delete them, you can

only deactivate them. Please plan your partition scheme carefully.

2. Set up a partition model.

3. Select an existing object to use or create a new object.

4. Add fields to the object, assign them to a partition, and select a partition

association mode.

5. Configure the views for each partition.

6. (Optional) Add partition-specific object links.

7. (Optional) Create new UI themes and associate them with your partitions.

8. (Optional) Create partitioned lookup values.

9. (Optional) Create portlets based on partitioned objects.

10. (Optional) Create processes.

Note: You do not need to restart CA Clarity PPM to enable partitioning —

all partitioning configuration changes are immediately available. You can

also transfer partition models and other items created in connection with

partitioning from CA Clarity PPM using the XML Open Gateway (XOG).

How to Create and Use Partitions

The basic guidelines for working with partition models are as follows:

■ Once you set up a partition you cannot move it, not even within the same

level.

■ You cannot delete partition models—you can only deactivate them.

■ You can set up more than one partition model within CA Clarity PPM.

■ An object can only be assigned to one partition model.

Note: To work with partition models, you will need Studio - Access, Partition -

Administrator and preferably System Partition - Administrator access rights.

Page 25: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Create and Use Partitions

Chapter 2: Partitions 25

Create Partition Models

To create a partition model

1. Select Partition Models from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Partition Models page appears.

2. Click New.

3. Complete the following fields:

Partition Model Name

Enter the partition model name.

ID

Enter a unique ID for the partition model.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also

avoid SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save

the new field, you cannot change the ID.

Description

Enter a brief description of the partition model.

4. Click Submit.

Page 26: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Create and Use Partitions

26 Studio Developer's Guide

Add a Partition to a Partition Model

Note: Before you perform this procedure, make sure you have already created

a partition model.

To add a partition to a partition model

1. Click Partition Models from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Partition Models page appears.

2. Click the name of the partition model to which you want to add a partition.

3. Click the Partitions tab.

4. Click New.

5. At Partition Name, enter a name for the partition.

6. At Partition ID, enter a unique ID for this partition.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also avoid

SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save the new

field, you cannot change the ID.

7. At Description, enter a brief description of the partition.

8. At UI Theme, select a color scheme to use for the partition.

9. If you are not adding the partition to the System Partition, at Parent

Partition click the Browse icon, select a (parent) partition, then click Add.

10. Click Submit.

11. (Optional) Repeat step 4 through step 10 add more partitions.

Note: You can authorize resources (users) or groups to be members of this

partition.

Page 27: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Create and Use Partitions

Chapter 2: Partitions 27

Add Many Partitions to a Partition Model (Quick Create)

Use Quick Create to create up to five partitions at once.

Note: Before you perform this procedure, make sure you have already created

a partition model.

To add many partitions to a partition model

1. Click Partition Models from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Partition Models page appears.

2. Click the name of the partition model you want to use.

3. Click the Partitions tab.

4. Click Quick Create.

5. At Partition Name, enter a name for the partition.

6. At Partition ID, enter a unique ID for this partition.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also avoid

SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save the new

field, you cannot change the ID.

7. At Description, enter a brief description of the partition.

8. If you are adding the partition to something other than the System

Partition, at Parent Partition click Browse and select that (parent) partition,

then click Add.

Note: You will not be able to select a parent partition if you haven‘t saved

the parent partition yet.

9. Click Submit.

Note: You can authorize resources (users) or groups to be members of this

partition.

Page 28: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Create and Use Partitions

28 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Members (Resources) to a Partition

Note: Before you perform this procedure, make sure you have already created

a partition model.

To add a member to a partition

1. If you just created the partition and have the Partition Properties page

displaying, go to add an individual user (resource). If not, open the

Administration Tool, and then select Partition Models from the CA Clarity

Studio menu.

The Partition Models page appears.

2. Click the name of the partition model to which you want to add members.

3. Click the Partitions tab.

4. If you do not see the partition you want, click the + icon at the left of the

ancestor partition to see child partitions.

5. In the row that contains the partition you want to use, click the Properties

icon.

6. To add an individual user (resource):

a. Click Resources.

b. Click Add.

c. Select the resource you want to add or at User Name enter the

resource‘s name, and then click Filter.

d. Check the box next to the resource name, and then click Add.

e. Repeat this step to add more resources to the partition.

7. Click Exit.

Note: You can authorize resources (users) or groups to be members of this

partition.

Page 29: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Create and Use Partitions

Chapter 2: Partitions 29

Select a Partition’s UI Theme

You can create a distinctive theme, including color and logo, for users who are

members of a partition. Partitions that do not have a designated UI theme

setting inherit the UI theme of its closest ancestor partition that does have a

UI theme. A user who is not a member of any partition always sees the UI

theme of the System Partition.

To select a UI theme for a partition

1. Select Partition Models from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Partition Models page appears.

2. Click the name of the partition model you want to use.

3. Click the Full View tab.

4. Click the name of the partition to which you want to assign a UI Theme.

5. At UI Theme, select the theme.

6. Click Save and Exit.

Apply a Partition Model to an Object

If you want to apply a partition model to a user-defined object, first create that

object.

Note: To perform the procedures in this section you must have Administration

- Studio access rights. See the CA Clarity PPM Administration Guide for details.

You do not have to be a member of a partition to perform this task.

To apply a partition model to an object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to apply a partition model.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. At Partition Model, click the Browse icon, select a partition, and then click

Add.

4. Click Save and Exit.

Page 30: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits
Page 31: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 31

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM

(PowerMods)

This section contains the following topics:

About Objects (see page 32)

Process Overview: Working with Objects (see page 34)

Data Providers (see page 34)

Create Objects (see page 41)

Grant Access to Objects (see page 42)

Object Attributes (see page 43)

How to Audit Objects (see page 92)

Delete Objects (see page 94)

About Add-Ins (see page 95)

Apply Add-Ins (see page 95)

Views (see page 96)

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab (see page 116)

Links for Pages and Subpages (see page 122)

Add Image Fields to List Column Views (see page 126)

Change Field Properties (see page 130)

How to Change a Field's Appearance (see page 132)

Menus, Sections, and Links (see page 144)

Icons (see page 147)

Stock Icons (see page 148)

Page 32: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Objects

32 Studio Developer's Guide

About Objects

Objects are the heart of the PowerMods functionality. Objects define the

attributes (fields), subpages (links), page layout, and views that make up your

configured version of CA Clarity PPM pages.

Several stock objects are available for you to use. For example, you can use

the Audit stock object to create pages that manage audit trail information. You

can use the Audit object as is or you can create a subobject of the object that

has only some of the characteristics of the Audit object. In this situation, this

object would be the master object and your new object would be a subobject.

You can also create a hierarchy of up to three levels of objects and then allow

child objects to inherit properties and access rights from parent objects.

Page 33: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Objects

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 33

If you are using partitions and you add a master object to a partition model,

any subobjects you create are automatically assigned to that same partition

model. When you change the master object, those changes are automatically

made available to the subobject. After you select an object to use, you will

then create an instance of the object that you will actually use in your

application.

Note: As the creator of an object, you automatically have access rights that

allow you to view and change the object. For other users to view and change

the new object, you will need to grant them access rights to it.

Page 34: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Process Overview: Working with Objects

34 Studio Developer's Guide

Process Overview: Working with Objects

As you work with objects:

■ Decide if you will use an existing object, or create a new one.

■ Decide if you want to enable the Copy feature to allow objects to be

copied. If you select the Copy Enabled check box when you create an

object, a user has the ability to copy the attributes of one instance of the

object when creating a new instance. The Copy From button appears for

the user in CA Clarity PPM only if you select the Copy Enabled check box.

■ Decide if you want to enable the Export feature to allow the object to be

exported in XML format.

■ Decide if you want to enable the View All feature that allows the object and

all of its subobjects to display on the View All Page Properties page.

■ Define attributes (fields) that display on the object's pages.

■ You can also create portlets that are like mini-reports which display

information as graphs, grids, or HTML pages.

■ Create links from the object to other pages.

■ Define a view that determines how information appears with the object.

■ Change how fields appear. For example you can change a field's color or

label. You can also use icons to represent data, link to other pages, or

downloadable documents. You can also display bar or Gantt charts in a List

Column Views.

Data Providers

Data providers, the source of grid and graph portlet data, are special data

constructs that can be accessed directly with portlets or through queries.

Data provider types are Queries, Objects, and System.

Queries

CA Clarity PPM provides a query language called NSQL, that is similar to

SQL, that you can use to create queries. If you are not familiar with SQL,

you can still create portlets using the built-in data providers that come

with CA Clarity PPM.

Objects

The stock CA Clarity PPM objects—and any objects you create—contain

fields that you can use to access database information.

Page 35: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Data Providers

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 35

System

System types are data providers for the restricted portlets. You can use

these data providers in addition to stock CA Clarity PPM objects.

System Type Description

Booking Status List Used with the Team object to list data about

requests for project resources or roles.

Investments This provides combined data for investment types

(Projects, Assets, Applications, Products, and

Other Investment).

Key Tasks This is a subset of the Task object and contains

data about key tasks.

Organizer Tasks This provides data about the tasks a resource is

assigned to.

Portfolios This contains portfolio data.

Programs This contains data about programs and the

projects which belong to a program.

Project Team Members This contains data about resources assigned to

projects.

Project Team Selection This contains data about resources assigned to

projects.

Resource's Projects List This lists data about projects that a resource is

assigned to.

Objects Data Provider

The stock objects and any objects you create contain attributes (fields) that

you can configure and use to access CA Clarity PPM information. For any

object, only the attributes that are listed on the Object Definition: Attributes

page display on its pages.

Note: Object functionality is not available for timesheets, financial

transactions, budgets, and forecasts.

Action Item

Action items are the units of work, or tasks, that you assign to members of

a project, or to yourself. Action items allow you to track the progress of

investments, and ensure that the investment is complete and on time. CA

Clarity PPM supports the following action items: personal, project, and

process. All action items can be viewed from the Action Item area of the

Organizer.

Page 36: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Data Providers

36 Studio Developer's Guide

Applications

See Other Investment object.

Asset

See Other Investment object.

Assignment

Assignments describe how a staff member will work on a task including the

start and finish time and dates, the actual and remaining work, and status.

Baseline

The baseline object contains a subset of project objects' fields and is a

snapshot of a project over time.

Benefit Plan Detail

This object describes benefit plan information used to enter proposed

returns on an investment.

Benefit Plan

This object contains benefit plan information used for the Benefit Plan list

page.

Change Requests

This object describes the criteria by which change requests are evaluated

and approved. This is a subobject of the Project object.

Constraint

This object stores project management task start and finish 'hints' to

scheduling. This is a subobject of the Task object.

Contract

This object contains information about project contracts.

Cost Plan Detail

This object details the cost plan information used to create cost projection

scenarios and budget revisions for an investment.

Cost Plan

This object contains the attributes used on the Cost Plan and Budget list

pages

Department

The object represents a place in a company's organizational chart. This

object is used primarily as a point of responsibility for staff and budgeting.

Dependency

This object stores project management dependencies between tasks.

Page 37: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Data Providers

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 37

Financial Properties

This object stores financial properties information displayed on the

Financial subpage for NPIOs.

Financials

This object stores the attributes for the Simple Budget page.

Fiscal Time Period

This object stores the fiscal time periods used in financial plans and

chargebacks.

GL Account

This object represents the general ledger account. A GL account is used

when charging departments costs delivered work, and for crediting

departments for the cost of resources.

Investment Parents

This object contains the attributes used on the Parents subtab under the

Hierarchy tab.

GL Allocation

This object represents the general ledger account. A GL account is used

when charging departments costs delivered work, and for crediting

departments for the cost of resources.

GL Allocation Detail

This object is used to capture the percentage of cost debited to a specified

GL account-department combination. This is a subobject of the GL

Allocation object.

Ideas

Ideas are the initial stage of creating new opportunities for investment

such as projects, assets, applications, programs, and products. Ideas lay

the foundation for a specific type of investment by serving as a container

for pertinent information. You can use CA Clarity PPM to track and convert

ideas into investment opportunities.

Incident

This object describes contact information, problem description, effort,

resolution, and resolver information for incidents (such as those reported

to a help desk).

Investment

This is an abstract object that contains the base attributes for all CA Clarity

PPM investments.

Page 38: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Data Providers

38 Studio Developer's Guide

Investment Rollup

This object stores attributes used in the financial rollup and effort rollup for

a project. This information is displayed in subtabs under the Hierarchy tab

that displays for a project.

Invoice

This object stores the invoice attributes used for chargebacks.

Issues

This is a risk that has been realized. This object enables risk property

management to help increase the likelihood of project success.

Other Investment

Applications, projects, assets, products, programs, and other investments

comprise the ―inventory‖ of a portfolio. Until an organization identifies,

catalogues, and adequately describes the complete domain of investments

within their portfolio, portfolio management is effectively impossible. Each

type has a common set of attributes such as budgeted cost, ROI, Risk, and

NPV.

Other Work

This object stores attributes used within the Other Work investment.

Portfolio

This object represents a portfolio of investments in CA Clarity PPM. It

supports the portfolio management process where decisions about

investments to continue, discontinue, postpone, or start are evaluated.

Product

A project is a related set of tasks performed to achieve a specific objective.

This object describes who is responsible for managing and working on a

project, when it needs to be done, and how much it will cost. Projects are

key investments within a portfolio.

Project Financial Properties

This object stores project properties information that appears on the

Financial subpage for projects.

Project

A project is a related set of tasks performed to achieve a specific objective.

This object describes who is responsible for managing and working on a

project, when it needs to be done, and how much it will cost. Projects are

key investments within a portfolio.

Page 39: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Data Providers

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 39

Requisition

The object describes information about requisitions such as the date it was

created, by whom, priority, status, description, and the project with which

it is associated.

This is a subobject of the Project object.

Requisition Resource

This object stores staffing requisition resource information. This is a

subobject of the Requisition object.

Resource Credit

This object is used to capture a set of attributes that uniquely defines a GL

account- department combination when setting chargeback credit rules.

Resource Credit Detail

This object is used to capture the percentage of cost credited to a specified

GL account-department combination. This is a subobject of the Resource

Credit object.

Risk

This object describes the measurement of a project's likelihood of meeting

expectations (finishing on time, within the budget, and with the expected

quality level), determined by a measurement in the project's methodology.

The Risk Indicator reflects the highest risk of component projects. This is a

subobject of the Project object.

Service

This object stores the attributes used by a service investment.

Subscription

The object represents the relationship between a consumer department

and a investment or service. This is a subobject of the Department object.

Task

This object describes activities that span a specified period of time. Tasks

are part of the WBS and feed the Project Plans. Time can be tracked to a

task. This is a subobject of the Project object.

Page 40: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Data Providers

40 Studio Developer's Guide

Team

This describes the resource types that can be added to a team. There are

four types of labor resources that make up a team:

■ Staff, a member of the project (resource or role) who is assigned

tasks.

■ Participant, a person who can access project to look at documents,

discussions, calendars, and properties, but are not assigned tasks.

■ Project Groups, a grouping of participants that can be assembled for

the project.

■ Collaboration Manager, a project role that allows you to create project

groups and grant participants

This is a subobject of the Project object.

System Types Data Provider

System types are data providers that are not based on a specific CA Clarity

PPM object. The following table describes each system type.

System Type Data Provider - Type Descriptions

Type Description

Baseline The baseline object contains a subset of project

objects' fields and is a snapshot of a project over time.

Booking Status List Used with the Team object to list data about requests

for project resources or roles.

Investments This provides combined data for investment types

(Projects, Assets, Applications, Products, and Other

Investment).

Key Tasks This is a subset of the Task object and contains data

about key tasks.

Organizer Tasks This provides data about the tasks a resource is

assigned to.

Portfolios This contains portfolio data.

Programs This contains data about programs and the projects

which belong to a program.

Project Team

Members

This contains data about resources assigned to

projects.

Project Team

Selection

This contains data about resources assigned to

projects.

Page 41: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Create Objects

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 41

Type Description

Resource's Projects

List

This lists data about projects that a resource is

assigned to.

Create Objects

Use the Object Definition: Properties page to view your CA Clarity PPM object's

properties and to define master and subobject relationships.

Once your object is created, you can assign access rights to users, OBS units,

or groups to access the object.

To create a new object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click New.

The Create Object Definition page appears.

3. Complete the following:

Object Name

Enter a name for the new object.

Object ID

Enter a unique ID for the new object.

Description

Enter a brief description for the new object.

4. At Master or Subobject, select the type of object you are creating.

Choose Master or Subobject.

5. (Optional, master objects only) At Partition Model, click the Browse icon

and select the partition model to which this object should be added, and

then click Add.

6. (Subobjects only) Click the Browse icon, select the master object of this

subobject, and then click Add.

7. Click Event Enabled to make CA Clarity PPM's process engine aware of

object instances that are created or updated.

8. Click Copy Enabled to allow copies to be made of this object's instances.

9. Click Export Enabled to allow this object's instances to be exported into

XML from an action on the properties page.

Page 42: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grant Access to Objects

42 Studio Developer's Guide

10. Click View All Enabled to allow this object's instances to have a view that

contains all properties, subobject lists, and personalizable page portlets on

a single page.

11. Click Save.

Grant Access to Objects

Use this procedure to grant access to an object for users, groups, or OBS

units.

Organizational breakdown structures (OBS) controls access, department

hierarchies, and reporting. If at least one OBS exists for an object, users can

associate those OBS's to their object instance.

To grant access to objects

1. If you just created the object and have the Object Properties page

displayed, go to To grant rights to:. If not, open the Administration Tool,

and click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object you want to use.

3. To grant rights to:

■ individuals, under Access to this Object, click Resource.

■ groups, under Access to this Object, click Group.

■ OBS Units, under Access to this Object, click OBS Unit.

4. Click Add.

5. Check the box next to the access right(s) you want to grant, and then click

Next.

6. Check the box next to each user you want to grant access to.

7. To add these users and quit, click Add.

8. To add more users click Add and Select More.

9. Click Exit when done.

10. To see which users are authorized to use the object, click Full View.

Page 43: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 43

Object Attributes

Attributes (fields) are information that is associated with, and may or may not

display on an object's pages. If you are using an existing object you can

choose which of the fields to display on one or more pages. If you create an

object, or if you want to add user-defined attributes to an existing object, the

topics in this section show you how to create them.

Attribute Data Types

There are several procedures for creating attributes (fields). The procedure

you use will depend upon the attribute's data type. See a description of

available data types in the following table and the page on which the

procedure for creating that type of attribute is located.

CA Clarity PPM supports 11 attribute data types and each one has unique

information that determines how the attribute is used and displays.

Note: Virtual attributes are not listed in the table because they do not

represent actual data in the database. URL (link attributes) also do not appear

because they are simply links to other pages.

Data Type Description

String A text field that contains up to 2000 characters.

Large String This is similar to a string field, but the number of

characters is limited only by your database. This type

does not support filtering or sorting.

Number A field that contains numbers that can be used in

calculations.

Formula A field that is a weighted average of two or more

number, formula, money, or lookup-number fields. A

lookup-number field is a lookup that returns a numeric

value rather than a string value.

Money A field that contains currency.

Boolean A field that indicates one of two exclusive states:

■ ―on‖ or ―off‖

■ ―true‖ or ―false‖

■ ―yes‖ or ―no‖

■ ―0‖ or ―1‖

■ ―approved‖ or ―not approved.

Page 44: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

44 Studio Developer's Guide

Data Type Description

Date A field that contains a date.

Lookup A field in which the user can select from predefined

choices. The choices can be static values entered by an

administrator or dynamic values returned from querying

the database. The following selection types are

available:

■ Static Lists, that consist of a set of static values

entered by an administrator.

■ Static Dependent Lists, which are like static lists in

that the administrator sets up all the possible

values, but the values are arranged hierarchically

like an OBS.

Sample uses include:

■ A ―Stage‖ field for an investment, but you need

different stages for different types of investments,

such as ―Research‖ and ―Develop‖ for a new product

but ―Proposal‖ and ―Deploy‖ for a new asset.

■ A ―Model‖ field for a ―Car‖ object, but you need to

offer ―SL1‖ and ―SL2‖ if the Make is a Saturn

whereas you need to offer ―Metro‖ and ―Tracker‖ if

the Make is a Geo.

■ Dynamic Queries, these lookups provide the most

up-to-date values possible and are best suited when

you want to offer a selection from a list of objects

such as resources, projects, issues, and so forth, as

opposed to a selection from a list of statuses or fixed

options.

Multi-valued

lookup

A lookup field in which more than one value can be set.

On the object's properties page, it displays as

multi-select browse. In a filter it can display as a

drop-down list, select box, single-select or multi-select

browse.

Attachment A field that contains a document attachment (such as a

Word document).

Time-varying A field in which a user can enter different values

depending on the time period being displayed. The user

can enter a start date and an end date for the value

entered. The value entered in the field can be one of the

following data units (measured per hour or per second):

number, percentage, or money.

Page 45: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 45

How to Add Attributes to Objects

CA Clarity PPM comes with stock attributes that you can use. These are listed

on the Object Definition: Attributes page in Studio. If you use a stock attribute,

you will not be able to change the attribute's general information (i.e. name,

ID, description, data type, lookup), but you can change how the attribute

appears.

When you create user-defined attributes:

■ Make sure your attributes meet the needs of your users. Once you create

an attribute, you cannot remove it from the object - you can only

deactivate it so that it does not display.

■ Create only the attributes you need. You can add up to 1,000 user-defined

attributes to an object, however attributes can increase the amount of

time it takes to display pages, so don't create more than you need.

When you add an attribute to an object, the attribute is added to all existing

instances of that object. As new instances of the object are created, they will

also contain the new attribute.

You can also create lookup attributes that display as drop-down or browse lists

from which users can select one or more choices. Lookups can be single or

multi-valued. Multi-valued lookup attributes are frequently used in filters.

If you want to provide a link that users can click to download documents, you

can create an attachment attribute. These attributes display as clickable links

in list views and as editable text attributes with open and delete icons in

property views. When the user clicks the open icon, a document that is

associated with the attribute is downloaded or displayed for the user.

You can create attributes that provide links to web pages or virtual attributes

that are not based upon items in the database, but are derived from other data

attributes. Examples of virtual attributes are progress bars, Gantt charts, or

attributes that display the calculated results for other attributes.

Page 46: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

46 Studio Developer's Guide

Add String Fields to Objects

Use this procedure to add a string (text) field. You can also use this procedure

to create large string fields whose size are limited only by the constraints of

your database. You should also consider the following limitations when using

the large string field data type:

■ Large string fields do not display in Lister Filter Views.

■ You cannot sort large string fields.

Use the Object Attribute page to add string fields to objects.

To add a string field to an object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Attribute Name

Defines the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Defines the unique ID for the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also

avoid SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save

the new field, you cannot change the ID.

6. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, complete the following fields:

Partition

Defines the partition with which this field is associated.

Partition Association Mode

Defines the partition that this field should be associated with.

Page 47: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 47

Options:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents. Associates the field with this

partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors. Associates the field only with this partition

and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to the

System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents. Associates the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren down the chain.

■ Partition only. Associates the field only with this partition.

Description

Defines the brief description of the field.

Data Type

Defines the type of data field you want to add.

Options:

■ String. Creates a field up to 2000 characters.

■ Large String. Creates a field up to an unlimited number of

characters.

Note: Once you save the field, you cannot change the data type.

Default Value

Defines the value that you want to appear as the default value for the

field.

Maximum Size

Defines the field's maximum size (up to 2000 characters).

Populate Null Values with the Default

Specifies whether you want to automatically populate existing objects

with the default value.

Default: Cleared

Value Required

Specifies whether you want to require that this field be non-blank,

either through an administrator-entered default or through end-user

entry.

Default: Cleared

Page 48: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

48 Studio Developer's Guide

Presence Required

Specifies whether you want to require that this field appear on the edit

properties page on at least one subpage.

Default: Cleared

Note: If the subpage that contains the field is not visible to some

users (due to display conditions or subpage security), then the field

will not be visible to the user.

Read-Only

Specifies whether you want to prevent users from changing the value

of this field.

Default: Cleared

Note: A read-only field must have a Default Value.

7. Click Submit.

Add Number Fields to Objects

Use this procedure to add a number data type attribute to an object.

To add a number field to an object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields.

Attribute Name

Enter the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Enter a unique ID for the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also

avoid SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save

the new field, you cannot change the ID.

Page 49: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 49

6. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, at:

Partition

Select the partition with which this lookup should be associated.

Partition Association Mode

Defines the partition association mode.

Values:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field with

this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors. To associate the field only with this

partition and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to

the System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents. To associate the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren, and so on down the chain.

■ Partition only. To associate the field only with this partition.

7. Complete the following fields:

Description

Defines the brief description for this number field.

Data Type

Choose Number.

Note: Once you save the field, you cannot change the data type.

Validation Range

Enter the range of values that are acceptable for this field. Enter the

lowest number in the first box and the highest number in the second

box.

Decimal Places

Enter the number of decimal places that should appear with this field.

Note: Enter ―0‖ to make the field an integer.

8. To display the number as a percent, click Show as Percent.

Do not select this check box if you want to display the number with a

percent sign.

9. If you want the field to appear with a default value, enter that value at

Default Value.

10. To automatically populate existing objects with the Default Value, check

Populate Null Values with the Default.

Page 50: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

50 Studio Developer's Guide

11. To require that this field be non-blank, either through an

administrator-entered default or through end-user entry, check Value

Required.

12. To require that this field appear on the Edit Properties view on at least one

subpage, check Presence Required.

13. To prevent users from changing this value, check Read-Only.

Note: A read-only field must have a Default Value assigned in if you want

the field to appear with a default value, enter that value at.

14. (Optional) To display the field in color:

a. At Type, choose Color.

Note: Once you begin defining a display mapping, you cannot switch

display mapping types. To do so, first clear out your existing mapping

and save. You can then choose Icon or Color in the Type drop-down

list.

b. At Color, select a color for the field.

c. At Description, enter a brief description of what the color represents.

d. At From, enter a number for the beginning of the range to be

represented by the color.

e. At To, enter a number for the end of the range to be represented by

the color.

f. Repeat the steps above to define any other ranges of numbers that

should be color-coded.

Note: Use color display mappings to associate a value or number range

with a description and a color. These colors can be used in many places

throughout CA Clarity PPM, such as in stoplight icons, filters, progress

bars, Gantt charts, and graph backgrounds.

15. (Optional) To display the field as an icon, at Type choose Icon and do the

following:

a. Click the Browse icon, select the icon you want to represent this range

of numbers, and then click Add.

b. At Description, enter a brief statement of what the icon represents.

c. At From, enter a number to for the beginning of the range to be

represented by the icon.

d. At To, enter a number to for the end of the range to be represented by

the icon.

Page 51: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 51

e. Repeat the steps above to define any other ranges of numbers that

should be represented by an icon.

Note: When you define ranges that are adjacent to one another, make

sure the ranges do not overlap. For example, the following ranges are

correctly defined to avoid number overlap: ―0-100‖, ―101-200‖, ―201-300‖.

You can define up to ten ranges in a mapping plus an optional Default

Bucket for all values that do not fall into defined ranges.

16. Click Submit.

Page 52: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

52 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Formula Fields to Objects

Use the following procedure to add a formula field to an object. Formula fields

compute the weighted average of two or more fields in the same object.

To add a formula field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add a formula field.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Edit the following fields:

Attribute Name

Enter the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Enter a unique ID that identifies the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and the underscore (_) characters. Do not

use SQL reserve words (such as SELECT or STRING). You cannot change

the Attribute ID after you save the field.

6. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, complete the following fields:

Partition

select the partition that this lookup should be associated with.

Partition Association Mode

Select:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field

with this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors, to associate the field only with this

partition and its parents.

■ Partition and descendents, to associate the field only with this

partition and its children.

■ Partition only, to associate the field only with this partition.

Description

Enter a brief description of the field.

Page 53: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 53

Data Type

Choose Formula.

Note: Once you save this field, you cannot change the data type.

Decimal Places

Enter the number of decimal places for data to be returned by the

field.

Note: Enter ―0‖ to make this an integer field.

7. (Optional) To display the field in color, complete the following fields:

a. Type, choose Color.

b. Color, select a color for the field.

Note: The first item you assign a color is the Default Bucket that

contains default values.

c. Description, enter a brief description of what the color represents.

d. From, enter a number to for the beginning of the range to be

represented by the color.

e. To, enter a number to for the end of the range to be represented by

the color.

8. Repeat Step 7 to define any other ranges of numbers that should be

color-coded.

9. (Optional) To display the field as an icon, at Type choose Icon, then:

a. Click the Browse icon, select the icon you want to represent this range

of numbers, and then click Add.

b. At Description, enter a brief statement of what the icon represents.

c. At From, enter a number for the beginning of the range to be

represented by the icon.

d. At To, enter a number for the end of the range to be represented by

the icon.

10. Repeat Step 9 to define any other ranges of numbers that should be

represented by an icon.

11. At Formula, click [Build Weighted Average Formula] to add a weighted

average formula.

The Build Weighted Average page appears.

a. In the Attribute column, select the name of the field you want to give

special consideration in the weighted average calculation.

Page 54: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

54 Studio Developer's Guide

b. At Weighting, enter a number.

The Attribute value is multiplied by the number you entered at

Weighting to compute the weighted average for that row. Weighted

values from all rows are added and their average is computed. The

entries you make in the Weighting column cause CA Clarity PPM to

consider the attribute to be more important than other attributes when

calculating the weighted average. If you do not make any entries in

the Weighting column, an ordinary arithmetic average is computed

instead.

For example:

weighted ave = [(Risk * 4) + (Customer Satisfaction * 2) +

(Alignment) * 1] /

c. To weight additional attributes, click New Row and repeat the steps

above.

d. To see if the weighted average formula works as expected, click

Recalculate. The page displays the formula results in the Test section.

12. Click Submit.

Page 55: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 55

Add Money Fields to Objects

Use this procedure to add a money field. CA Clarity PPM associates money

fields with a currency code so that you can convert the value to another

currency if necessary.

To add a money field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the name of the attribute to which you want to add the money field.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. At Attribute Name, enter the name of the new field.

6. At Attribute ID, enter a unique ID that identifies the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric characters and the underscore (_) character.

Also avoid SQL reserved words (such as SELECT or STRING). You cannot

change the ID once you save the new field.

7. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition:

a. At Partition, select the partition that this lookup should be associated

with.

b. At Partition Association Mode, select:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field

with this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors, to associate the field only with this

partition and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to

the System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents, to associate the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren, and so on down the chain.

■ Partition only, to associate the field only with this partition.

8. At Description, enter a brief statement about the field.

9. At Data Type, choose Money.

Note: Once you save this field, you cannot change the data type.

10. To provide a currency code for the field, do one of the following:

■ Select Attribute has its own currency code field.

Page 56: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

56 Studio Developer's Guide

■ At Default Currency Code, choose the default currency code from the

drop down.

■ If the currency code is held in an existing field of the same object,

select Reference another attribute of this object. Then at Which Field,

choose the field that contains the currency code from the drop down.

11. At Validation Range, enter the lowest amount allowed for the field in the

first box, and the highest amount allowed in the second box.

12. If you want the field to appear with a default value, at Default Value enter

that value.

13. To automatically populate existing objects with the default value, click

Populate Null Values with the default.

14. To prevent users from entering values in the field, click Value Required.

15. To prevent users from removing this field from a view, click Presence

Required.

16. To prevent users from changing the field, click Read-Only.

Note: A read-only field must have a default value assigned.

17. (Optional) To display the field in color:

a. At Type, choose Color.

b. At Color, select a color for the field.

c. At Description, enter a brief description of what the color represents.

d. At From, enter a number to for the beginning of the range to be

represented by the color.

e. At To, enter a number to for the end of the range to be represented by

the color.

f. Repeat the steps above to define any other ranges of numbers that

should be color-coded.

18. (Optional) To display the field as an icon, at Type choose Icon.

a. Click the Browse icon, select the icon you want to represent this range

of numbers, and then click Add.

b. At Description, enter a brief statement of what the icon represents.

c. At From, enter a number for the beginning of the range to be

represented by the icon.

d. At To, enter a number for the end of the range to be represented by

the icon.

e. Repeat the steps above to define any other ranges of numbers that

should be represented by an icon.

19. Click Submit.

Page 57: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 57

Add Boolean Fields to Objects

Use Boolean fields to indicate one of two exclusive conditions.

To add a Boolean field to an object

1. Select Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Attribute Name

Defines the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Defines the unique ID that identifies the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and the underscore (_) characters. Do

not use SQL reserve words (such as SELECT or STRING). You cannot

change the Attribute ID after you save the field.

6. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, complete the following fields:

Partition

Defines the partition that this field should be associated with.

Partition Association Mode

Defines the partition that this field should be associated with.

Options:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents. Associates the field with this

partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors. Associates the field only with this partition

and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to the

System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents. Associates the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren down the chain.

■ Partition only. Associates the field only with this partition.

Page 58: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

58 Studio Developer's Guide

Description

Defines the brief description of the field.

Page 59: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 59

Data Type

Defines the type of data field you want to add. Choose Boolean.

Note: Once you save this field, you cannot change the data type.

Default

Specifies whether the field's default value is true (selected) or false

(cleared).

Default: Cleared

Populate Null Values with the Default

Specifies whether to automatically populate existing objects with the

default value.

Default: Cleared

Presence Required

Specifies whether to require that this field appear on the Edit

Properties view of at least one subpage.

Default: Cleared

Note: If the subpage that contains the field is not visible to some

users (due to display conditions or subpage security), then the field

will not be visible to the user.

Read-Only

Specifies whether you want to prevent users from changing the value

of this field.

Default: Cleared

7. In the Display Mapping section of the page, (Optional) to display the field

in color, complete the following fields. Repeat this step to define any other

ranges of numbers that should be color-coded.

Type

Choose Color.

At Color

Select a color for the field.

At Description

Enter a brief description of what the color represents.

8. In the Display Mapping section of the page, (Optional) to display the field

as an icon, in the Type field, choose Icon. Repeat this step to define any

other ranges of numbers that should be represented by an icon.

a. Click the Browse icon, select the icon you want to represent this the

true or false state, and then click Add.

Page 60: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

60 Studio Developer's Guide

b. Enter a brief statement of what the icon represents in the Description

field.

9. Click Submit.

Page 61: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 61

Add Date Fields to Objects

Use this procedure to add a date field.

To add a date field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

a. Attribute Name, enter the name of the new field.

b. Attribute ID, enter a unique ID for the field.

Note: This code must contain only alphanumeric characters and the

underscore (_) character, and it must also not be a SQL reserved

word. Once you have submitted or saved a field, the ID cannot be

changed.

6. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, at:

a. Partition, select the partition that this lookup should be associated

with.

b. Partition Association Mode, select:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field

with this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors, to associate the field only with this

partition and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to

the System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents, to associate the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren, and so on down the chain.

■ Partition only, to associate the field only with this partition.

7. At Description, enter a brief description of the field.

8. At Data Type, choose Date.

Note: Once you save the field, you cannot change the data type.

9. Indicate the earliest date to include. At Validation From, choose:

■ Rolling Date, and select the macro to use such as Yesterday, Start of

Current Year, etc.

Page 62: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

62 Studio Developer's Guide

■ At Specific Date, and select a date (e.g. 10/6/04) and time, or click

the Date icon and select one from the calendar.

■ At Time, and select the hour and/or minutes.

10. Indicate the latest date to include. At Validation To, select:

■ At Rolling Date, and select the macro to use such as Yesterday, Start

of Current Year, etc.

■ At Specific Date, and select a date (e.g. 10/6/04) and time, or click

the Date icon and select one from the calendar.

■ At Time, select the hour and/or minutes.

11. Indicate the default date. At Default Date, select:

■ At Rolling Date, and select the macro to use such as "Yesterday",

"Start of Current Year", etc.

■ At Specific Date, and select a date (e.g. 10/6/04) and time, or click

the Date icon and select one from the calendar.

■ At Time, and select the hour and/or minutes for the default date.

12. To automatically populate existing objects with the Default Date (that you

specified in Indicate the default date), check Populate Null Values with the

Default.

13. To require that users enter a value in the field, check Value Required.

14. To prevent users from removing the field in their Edit Properties view,

check Presence Required.

15. To prevent users from changing this field, check Read-Only.

Note: A read-only date field must have a default date.

16. Click Submit.

Page 63: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 63

Add Lookup Fields to Objects

Lookup fields display a drop-down or browse list from which users can select

items. Lookup fields are frequently used in filters. Use the following procedure

to add a lookup field based upon a single item.

Note: The lookup you add must already exist before you can add it to an

object.

To add a lookup field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

Attribute Name

Defines the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Defines the unique ID for the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also

avoid SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save

the new field, you cannot change the ID.

5. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, complete the following fields:

Partition

Defines the partition with which this lookup is associated.

Partition Association Mode

Defines the partition association mode.

Options:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents. Associates the field with this

partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors. Associates the field only with this partition

and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to the

System Partition.

Page 64: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

64 Studio Developer's Guide

■ Partition and descendents. Associates the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren down the chain.

■ Partition only. Associates the field only with this partition.

Description

Defines the brief description of the field.

Data Type

Choose lookup.

Note: Once you save the field, you cannot change the data type.

Lookup

Defines the lookup you want to use, and then click Save.

Default

Defines the value that you want to appear as the default value for the

field.

Populate Null Values with the Default

Specifies whether you want to automatically populate existing objects

with the default value.

Default: Cleared

Value Required

Specifies whether you want to require that this field be non-blank,

either through an administrator-entered default or through end-user

entry.

Default: Cleared

Presence Required

Specifies whether you want to require that this field appear on the edit

properties page on at least one subpage.

Default: Cleared

Note: If the subpage that contains the field is not visible to some

users (due to display conditions or subpage security), then the field

will not be visible to the user.

Read-Only

Specifies whether you want to prevent users from changing the value

of this field.

Default: Cleared

Note: A read-only field must have a Default Value.

Page 65: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 65

6. (Optional) If you selected static lookup, you can set up a display mapping

that lets you associate a value or number range with a description and a

color. These colors can be used in many places throughout CA Clarity PPM,

such as in stoplight icons, filters, progress bars, Gantt charts, and graph

backgrounds. To set up a display mapping:

a. At Type, choose Color.

b. At Color, select a color for the field.

c. At Description, enter a brief description of what the color represents.

d. Repeat the steps above to define any other ranges of numbers that

should be color-coded.

e. At Value, select the lookup value to be represented by the color. You

can define colors for up to ten values in a mapping plus an optional

Default Bucket for all values that do not have an assigned color.

f. Repeat the steps above to define any other color-value combinations.

7. (Optional) To display the field as an icon, at Type choose Icon.

a. Click the Browse icon, select the icon you want to represent this the

true or false state, and then click Add.

b. At Description, enter a brief statement of what the icon represents.

c. Repeat the steps above to define any other ranges of numbers that

should be represented by an icon.

8. Click Submit.

Page 66: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

66 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Multi-valued Lookup Fields to Objects

Multi-valued lookup fields display a drop-down or browse list from which users

can choose one or more items. On a properties page, it displays as a

multi-select browse field. In a filter it can display as a drop-down list, select

box, single-select or multi-select browse field.

Multi-valued lookup fields:

■ Cannot have default values.

■ Cannot be required or read-only fields.

■ Cannot have display mappings.

■ Are not supported by the XML Open Gateway (XOG).

Note: The lookup you add must already exist before you can add it to an

object.

To add a multi-valued lookup field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. At Attribute Name, enter the name of the new field.

6. At Attribute ID, enter a unique ID for the field.

Note: This code must contain only alphanumeric characters and the

underscore (_) character. and it must also not be a SQL reserved word.

Once you save a field, you cannot change the ID.

7. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition:

a. At Partition, select the partition that this lookup should be associated

with.

b. At Partition Association Mode, select:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field

with this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors, to associate the field only with this

partition and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to

the System Partition.

Page 67: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 67

■ Partition and descendents, to associate the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren, and so on down the chain.

■ Partition only, to associate the field only with this partition.

8. At Description, enter a brief description of the field.

9. At Data Type, choose Multi Valued Lookup.

Note: Once you save the field, the data type cannot be changed.

10. At Lookup, click the Browse icon, and select the lookup you want to use,

then click Save.

11. Click Save.

Page 68: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

68 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Attachment Fields to Objects

Attachment fields can display links to up to ten documents. Users can use CA

Clarity PPM's search utility to find content in their document attachments, just

like any other document that has been checked into the Knowledge Store or

Document Manager.

To add a attachment field to an object

1. Select Objects from the Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. At Attribute Name, enter the name of the new field.

6. At Attribute ID, enter a unique ID for the field.

Note: This code must contain only alphanumeric characters and the

underscore (_) character. and it must also not be a SQL reserved word.

Once you save a field, you cannot change the ID.

7. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition:

a. At Partition, select the partition that this lookup should be associated

with.

b. At Partition Association Mode, select:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field

with this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors, to associate the field only with this

partition and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to

the System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents, to associate the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren, and so on down the chain.

■ Partition only, to associate the field only with this partition.

8. At Description, enter a brief description of the field.

9. At Data Type, choose Attachment.

Note: Once you save a field, you cannot change the data type.

Page 69: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 69

10. Do one of the following in the Attachment Style field:

■ To attach just one document, select Single Document.

■ To attach up to 10 attachments, select Multiple Documents, then enter

the maximum number of attachments allowed in the Maximum

Number of Attachments field.

11. To require that users provide an attachment, check Value Required.

12. To require that this field always appears in the user's Edit Properties view

and cannot be removed, check Presence Required.

13. Click Submit.

Page 70: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

70 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Time-varying Fields to Objects

Time-varying fields allow users to enter different values for specific periods of

time. For example, a time-varying field can allow a user to enter the number

of hours worked on a project between a start and end date. Alternately, the

field can be set up to allow a user to enter the percentage of hours allotted to

a project that were worked between a start and end date, or the dollars spent

on a project for a specified time.

To add a time-varying field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the field.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

■ Attribute Name. Enter the name of the new field.

■ Attribute ID. Enter a unique ID for the field.

Note: Use only alphanumeric and underscore (_) characters. Also

avoid SQL reserved words such as SELECT or STRING. Once you save

the new field, you cannot change the ID.

6. (Optional if you have created partitions) To associate this field with a

particular partition, complete the following fields:

Partition

Select the partition that this lookup should be associated with.

Partition Association Mode

Select:

■ Partition, ancestors and descendents, to associate the field

with this partition and its parents and child partitions.

■ Partition and ancestors, to associate the field only with this

partition and its parents, grandparents, and so on up the chain to

the System Partition.

■ Partition and descendents, to associate the field only with this

partition and its children, grandchildren, and so on down the chain.

■ Partition only, to associate the field only with this partition.

Page 71: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 71

7. Complete the following fields:

Description

Enter a brief description of the field.

Data Type

Select Time-varying. Once you save the field, you cannot change the

data type.

■ Time-varying Data Units. Select the appropriate data unit from

the drop-down. This selection determines what the value entered

in the field represents: a number value, a monetary value, or a

percentage.

■ Time-varying Unit Conversion. Select Seconds or Hours to

determine whether the time-varying data units are per hour or per

second.

■ Time-Varying Date Constraints. Start and finish dates selected

here provide a default date range for the field. A user can enter

dates in CA Clarity PPM that override the default dates. If no

selection is made, the default values are the widest available

range. Defining a date constraint limits the range of data received

for the field and improves processing performance.

8. If you selected Money as the time-varying data unit, to provide a currency

code for the field, do one of the following:

■ Check the box next to Attribute has its Own Currency Code Field. Then

at Default Currency Code, select the default currency code.

■ If the currency code is held in an existing field of the same object,

check Reference Another Attribute of this Object. Then at Which Field,

select the field that contains the currency code.

9. Click Save.

Page 72: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

72 Studio Developer's Guide

Create Parameterized Lookup Attribute to Objects

Use this procedure to create a lookup attribute that allows mapping between

NSQL query parameters and the appropriate object attributes. This procedure

assumes that the NSQL query to be mapped already exists.

Note: See the Administration Guide for more information on parameterized

lookups and NSQL queries.

To create a parameterized lookup attribute

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object for which you want to create an attribute.

3. The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

4. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

5. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

6. Complete the following fields:

Attribute Name

Enter the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Enter a unique ID for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select Lookup. when you select Lookup, the remaining fields on the

page change.

7. Click the Browse icon next to the Lookup field and search for, select, and

add the lookup associated with the NSQL query you want to map.

8. Click Save.

The Lookup Parameter Mappings section displays at the bottom of the

page. The parameters listed in the section are from the NSQL code for the

lookup associated with the new attribute.

9. For each lookup parameter listed in the section, select an object attribute

ID.

10. Click Submit.

Page 73: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 73

Calculated Attributes

A calculated attribute is a attribute whose value is based on a calculation using

the values of other attributes. For example, you might create a attribute called

"Remaining Budget" whose value is derived from the following formula:

Remaining Cost = Planned Cost - Actual Cost

In this case, a attribute's value (Remaining Budget) depends on the value of

two other attributes (Planned Cost and Actual Cost).

The value of a calculated attribute is not stored in the database; it is

determined at runtime by extracting the value from an equation set up for the

attribute. Because the value is not stored in the database, you cannot sort, use

a power filter, or manually update calculated attributes.

CA Clarity PPM provides a number of functions for calculation of an attribute's

value. The functions can be compounded to produce a complex calculation if

that is required for the attribute. For example, you might take the absolute

value of the difference in the equation given in the previous example:

Remaining Cost = Absolute (Planned Cost - Actual Cost)

Note that a calculated attribute can include other calculated attributes. CA

Clarity PPMdetermines the precedence of any calculated attributes included in

an expression at run-time.

The following attribute types cannot be used with calculated attributes:

■ Formula

■ Time-varying

■ Attachment

■ Long String

■ Multi-Value Lookups

■ Virtual

The result data type showing the results of the calculation can be one of the

following data types, depending on the function:

■ Number. This data type is used for a calculated attribute that requires a

number value such as a sum or an average of several numbers.

■ String. This data type is used for a calculated attribute that requires the

concatenation of two or more values, for example, the value of the

attribute "created_by" and the constant "2007." An example of the value

produced by the concatenation is "ssmith 2007."

■ Date. This data type is used to calculate dates using basic arithmetic or to

provide the current date.

Page 74: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

74 Studio Developer's Guide

Note: You can receive a null result if the value of a parameter (field source)

included in an expression is null when the expression is evaluated for an

instance. A null result also occurs when the expression cannot be resolved. For

example, division by zero produces a null result.

Calculated Attribute Functions

The following table shows the functions that allow you to create a calculated

attribute.

Function Attribute Parameters Result Data

Type

Return Value

Absolute Value Absolute(number) Number Absolute value of

the number.

Add Add(number1, number2)

Add(number1, <constant>)

(ex: Add(A, 10))

Number Adds the value of

number1 to the

value of number2

and returns the

result of the

operation.

Average Average(number1, number2 …) Number Returns the

average of all of

the parameters

passed in.

Concatenate Concat(string1, string2 … )

Concat(string1, <constant> …)

String Concatenated

string.

Date Add DateAdd(date attribute, unit, number)

■ Date attribute: This value can be an

attribute name or a sub-expression

only. It cannot be a constant.

■ Unit: Day, Hour, Minute, or Second.

This value is case-sensitive.

■ Number: Number of units to add to

the date.

(ex: DateAdd(approvedtime, ‖Day‖,4).

This expression returns a date value

that equals approvedtime + 4 days.)

Date Date value after the

number of units is

added.

Date Difference DateDiff(date attribute1, date attribute

2, result unit)

■ Date attribute1: The date you are

subtracting from. This value can

only be an attribute name or a

sub-expression.

Number Returns the

number value as

specified in the

result unit, the

difference of date

attribute1 minus

Page 75: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 75

Function Attribute Parameters Result Data

Type

Return Value

■ Date attribute2: The date you are

subtracting. This value can only be

an attribute name or a

sub-expression.

■ Result unit: Day, Hour, Minute, or

Second. This value is case

sensitive.

(ex: DateDiff(startdate,

enddate,‖Day‖). This expression returns

a value indicating the number of days

between startdate and enddate.)

date attribute2.

Divide Divide(number1, number2)

Divide(number1, <constant>)

(ex: Divide (A,50))

Number Result from attr1

(number) divided

by attr2 (divisor).

Maximum Max(number1, number2 …) Number Largest value in the

set of values, so if:

A=10, B=20, C=30

Max(A, B, C) will

return 30.

Minimum Min(number1, number2 ... ) Number Smallest value in

the set of values,

so if:

A=10, B=20, C=30

Min(A, B, C) will

return 10.

Multiply Multiply(number1, number2)

Multiply(number1, <constant> )

(ex: Multiply (A,50))

Number Product from the

two parameters.

Now Now() Date Returns the current

date and time.

Page 76: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

76 Studio Developer's Guide

Function Attribute Parameters Result Data

Type

Return Value

Percentage Percentage(number1, number2)

(ex: Percentage (A,B))

Percentage(number1, <constant>)

(ex: Percentage (A,50))

Number Result after the

percentage is

taken. (ex: If

A=1000, A *

60%= 600, the

return value will be

600).

Power Power(number, power) Number Result of the

number raised to a

power specified.

Round Round(number, <number of digits>) Number Value after

rounding the

number to a

specific number of

digits.

Square Root Sqrt(number) Number Square root of

number.

Subtract Subtract(number1, number2)

Subtract(number1, <constant>)

(ex: Subtract(A, 10))

Number Subtracts the value

of number1 from

the value of

number2 and

returns the result

of the operation.

Sum Sum(number1, number2, ...) Number Sum from the list of

attributes.

A=10, B=20, C=30

Sum(A, B, C) will

return 60.

Page 77: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 77

Function Attribute Parameters Result Data

Type

Return Value

Truncate Trunc(number, <number of digits>) Number Value after

removing the

decimal or fraction

part of the number.

How to View Calculated Attributes

You must include the calculated attribute in the layout of the object's

Properties view so that it can be viewed in CA Clarity PPM.

Page 78: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

78 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Calculated Attributes

The following procedure explains how to create a calculated attribute.

To add a calculated attribute

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object for which you want to create a calculated

attribute.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Attribute Name

Enter a name for the attribute. The name you enter appears in the

instance of the object when the attribute is configured properly for

layout.

Attribute ID

Enter a unique ID for the attribute.

Data Type

Select Calculated from the drop-down list.

Result Data Type

Select Number, String, or Date to indicate the data type for the result

of the calculation.

6. Click Submit.

The attribute is created and appears in the list of attributes for the object.

Page 79: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 79

Build Calculations onto Object Attributes

To build the calculation expression, do one of the following:

■ Generate the expression in Studio by completing information about the

arguments and clicking Generate.

A generated expression for the sum of three numbers (num1, num2, and

num2) would appear in the Expression text box in the following format:

Sum(num1, num2, num3)

■ Manually enter the expression in the designated text box.

You can use the following unary operators: +, -, *, and / when the result

data type is Number. For example, the sum of three numbers can be

entered manually in the Expression text box as (num1+num2+num3). The

use of the unary operators can replace the Add, Sum, Multiply, Divide, and

Subtract functions.

To build the calculation

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Select the object containing the attribute to which you want to build the

calculation.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the name of the new calculated attribute from the object‘s list of

attributes.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Click the Build Calculated Attribute link located in the Calculation field.

The Calculated Attribute page appears.

6. Select the appropriate function from the Function drop-down list.

7. Select the number of arguments in the Argument Number field. If the

function selected has a specific number of arguments, the field is read

only. If you can vary the number of arguments in the function, you can

make a selection from the drop-down list.

8. Create the arguments for the function's expression by selecting one of the

following options for each argument listed:

■ Constant. This is a value that remains the same for all calculations.

Enter the value in the field.

Page 80: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

80 Studio Developer's Guide

■ Attribute Name (ID). Select an attribute from the drop-down list to

have to attribute's value included in the calculation. The list shows the

available object attribute names for the data type selected (number,

string, or date).

■ Sub-expression. Select this option to have an expression embedded

within the expression you are building for the calculation. You can

accept the default name in the text box or enter a different name for

the sub-expression.

9. Click Generate to generate the function's expression in the Expression text

box.

10. If you selected Sub-expression as one of the options, do the following:

a. In the Generate Expression for field, select the name of the

sub-expression.

b. In the Function field, select the function that defines the purpose of the

sub-expression.

c. Select and define the arguments for the sub-expression.

d. Click Generate to include the defined arguments for the sub-expression

in the whole expression.

11. When you are satisfied that all sub-expressions are defined for the whole

expression, click Validate to ensure that the expression's syntax is correct

and make any adjustments necessary.

12. Click Submit.

Page 81: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 81

By Example: Building Calculations onto Object Attributes

The following example shows the creation of an expression for the absolute

value of the difference between an investment's planned cost and actual cost.

The calculation can be expressed by the following equation:

Remaining Cost = Absolute(Planned Cost - Actual Cost)

The following figure shows the link for the tool that assists you in building an

expression for a calculated attribute.

When you click the Build Calculated Attribute link, the following dialog box

appears.

Page 82: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

82 Studio Developer's Guide

In the example, the absolute value of the difference between two numbers is

the desired result. When you select the "Absolute" function, the appropriate

fields for defining the function's argument appear. The following figure shows

the fields for defining the argument.

The Absolute function has only one argument. The Sub-expression option is

selected to represent the expression for the difference between the numbers.

When you click Generate, the expression appears in the Expression text box.

Page 83: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 83

When you include a sub-expression in a generated expression, the Generate

Expression for field appears at the top of the dialog box. To define the

sub-expression, you must select its name in the Generate Expression for field

and you must select the function for the sub-expression (Subtract in this

example) in the Function field.

Select the arguments for the Subtract function (Planned Cost and Actual Cost)

from the available list of attribute names for the object using the drop down

list.

When you click Generate, the entire expression with the sub-expression

defined appears in the Expression text box. The following figure shows the full

expression for the calculated attribute.

Page 84: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

84 Studio Developer's Guide

Test the Calculated Attribute

To test a calculated attribute, create an instance of the object for the

calculated attribute in CA Clarity PPM. Before you can see the calculated

attribute in CA Clarity PPM, you must add it to the object's Properties view and

select the layout for the attribute.

Autonumber Object Attributes

You can use the auto-numbering feature to automatically name and number

object attributes that have a data type of string. For example, you can

auto-number the string attribute "Project ID." This ensures that when you

create a new project, the Project ID field is automatically populated with a new

project ID. You can also name and number attributes for sub-objects and the

children of sub-objects.

Each auto-numbered attribute of an object must have its own specific

auto-numbering scheme defined.

You can use auto-numbering with or without partitions. If you do not use a

partition, the System Partition is the default. If you use partitions, you can

define a different auto-numbering scheme for attributes in each partition.

How Autonumbering Works with Partitions

When an object is associated with a partition model, you can create different

auto-numbering schemes in each partition. This allows you to create

auto-numbering schemes for attributes associated with different aspects of

your business. For example, if you create a partition model that has partitions

called Sales, Marketing, and Engineering, an auto-numbering scheme can be

set up that assigns a unique number for attributes created in the partition. For

example, SAL-000001, MKT-000001, or ENG-000001. When a user creates an

object instance in CA Clarity PPM, designated attributes are automatically

numbered using the auto-numbering scheme created for the appropriate

partition.

The following rules apply to using auto-numbering with partitions:

■ If an attribute is set to auto-numbered but there is no auto-numbering

scheme defined, the auto-numbering scheme of the closest ancestor

partition is applied when an object instance is created in the application.

■ If a deactivated partition has active descendant partitions that have no

auto-numbering scheme in place, the closest ancestor auto-numbering

scheme will be used when object instances are created in the descendant

partitions.

Page 85: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 85

■ If an attribute belongs to a sub-object that has multiple master objects

(potentially in different partition models) and the attribute is created in the

context of a specific master object, the auto-numbering schemes will only

be applied when an instance of the sub-object is created under an instance

of the specific master object.

Create Auto-Numbering Schemes on Objects

To create auto-numbering schemes for object attributes, you must have the

Object Administration or the Attribute Create access right.

To set up an auto-numbering scheme, you define the segments that make up

the number separately. For example, the scheme to create a project number

such as ―PRJ00001‖ consists of two segments:

■ One for the three-character prefix ―PRJ‖, and

■ Another segment for the five digit number ―000001‖

You can create an auto-numbering scheme for a string data type object

attribute that consists of one or more segments of:

■ Text

■ Alpha-numeric counters (a combination of letters and numbers)

■ Numbers

■ Creation date

■ A reference to an attribute in a parent object

Important! If you use auto-numbering with two or more object types, make

sure that generated numbers for different object types cannot be the same. CA

Clarity PPM does not ensure that numbers are unique for different types of

objects. You can avoid duplications by using an alphanumeric numbering

scheme so that object types have a unique prefix such as "ASSET" for asset or

"PRJ" for project followed by a numeric counter.

Once created, each time a resource creates a new instance of the object, the

object ID will automatically populate using the auto-numbering scheme you

created.

To create an auto-numbering scheme

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object for which you want to create an

auto-numbering scheme.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

Page 86: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

86 Studio Developer's Guide

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the name of the string data type attribute for which you want to

create an auto-numbering scheme.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Click Auto-numbering in the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attribute Auto-numbering page appears.

6. In the Schemes section, click New.

The Auto-numbering Scheme page appears.

7. In the Scheme Name field, enter up to 80 characters for the scheme name.

For example, ―PRJ‖ or ―INV‖.

8. Click Save.

9. In the Segments section, click New.

10. At Type of Segment, select one of the following options:

■ Text. Creates a segment that contains only letters.

■ Numeric Counter. Creates a segment that contains only numbers.

■ Alpha-Numeric Counter. Creates a segment that contains letters and

numbers.

■ Instance Creation Date. Creates a segment that is a time stamp for

the instance being auto-numbered. The date format is: YYYYMMDD.

■ Parent Object Attribute Reference. (Sub-object attributes only)

Creates a segment that has the value of a unique attribute of the

parent object. This segment is a constant that cannot be incremented.

As you create the segments for the auto-numbering scheme, the scheme's

structure is shown in the General Information section in the Next Number

field.

11. If you are creating a text segment, in the Text Value field enter the

characters to use for this segment of the scheme. For example ―PRJ‖.

12. If you are creating a numeric or alpha-numeric counter segment, do the

following:

a. In the Counter Starting Number field enter the first number to use in

the numeric sequence.

b. In the Counter Length field, select the number of digits to use for the

segment.

c. Select the Auto-extended check box to extend the counter length when

the limit of the counter length is reached.

Page 87: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 87

13. If you are creating a parent object attribute reference segment, do the

following:

a. In the Referenced Attribute field, click Browse and select the attribute

in the parent object. The value of the attribute will be included in the

numbering segment.

For example, if the referenced attribute is "Name" and the referenced

object is "Project," when an instance of the specific sub-object

attribute (for example, a new task) is created in the application, the

name of the Project (up to 8 characters) is part of the numbering

scheme. For example, NewNet00000001

b. In the Segment Max Length field, select the length that you want this

segment to be. Note that the replacement value (the referenced

attribute) will be truncated if it is longer than the length selected.

14. Click Submit to create the segment.

15. Create as many segments as necessary.

16. In the Schemes section, select the partition the numbering scheme for the

attribute applies to. If the attribute's object is not associated with a

partition, only the System Partition is available.

17. To activate this scheme, select the Auto-numbered check box in the

General section.

Note: When auto-numbering is activated, users will not be able to change

object IDs because CA Clarity PPM will create them.

18. Click Save.

Page 88: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

88 Studio Developer's Guide

Modify Auto-Numbering Schemes

To modify auto-numbering schemes for object attributes, you must have the

Object Administration or the Attribute Create access right.

This procedure explains how to modify an existing auto-numbering scheme for

an object attribute.

To modify an auto-numbering scheme

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. In the list of objects, click the object to open its Properties page.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the attribute whose auto-numbering scheme you want to modify.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. In the content menu on the left, click Auto-numbering.

The Object Definition: Attribute Auto-numbering page appears.

6. In the Partition field, select the partition for which the change to the

numbering scheme for the attribute applies.

If the attribute's object is not associated with a partition, only the System

Partition is available.

7. In the Schemes section, click Edit.

The Auto-numbering Scheme page appears.

8. To reorder the segments in the scheme, do the following:

a. Click Reorder.

b. Highlight segments individually and use the arrows to move them to

the correct position.

c. Click Submit when you are done.

As you make changes, the auto-numbering scheme's structure is shown in

the General Information section in the Next Number field.

9. Make changes to the segments as needed by clicking the segment name in

the Type of Segment column.

10. Click Save.

Page 89: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 89

Deactivating an Attribute's Auto-Numbering Scheme

This procedure explains how to deactivate an auto-numbering scheme for an

object attribute.

To deactivate an auto-numbering scheme

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the attribute whose auto-numbering scheme you want to deactivate.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. In the content menu on the left, click Auto-numbering.

The Object Definition: Attribute Auto-numbering page appears.

6. Clear the Auto-numbered check box.

7. Click Save.

Modify Object Attributes

Use this procedure to modify user-defined object attributes.

To modify an object attribute

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object you want to modify.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Select the name of the attribute you want to modify from the list.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Modify the attribute, and submit your changes.

Page 90: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

90 Studio Developer's Guide

Delete Object Attributes

Use this procedure to delete user-defined object attributes. You cannot delete

stock attributes. When you delete an attribute, the attribute is removed from

the object's views and the database. The following changes also occur:

■ Any attributes derived from the deleted attribute are deleted.

■ A record of the deletion is stored in the Audit Trail log.

■ Queries that use the database table column created for the attribute are

identified so that they can be removed manually.

■ Calculated and formula attributes that use the attribute prompt a warning

message.

Some attribute information is not deleted. If you use the attribute in reports or

reference the attribute in custom database code, these uses are not deleted.

Some uses of the attribute in NSQL queries may not be deleted.

If an attribute is being used anywhere in the view by a user, you cannot delete

the attribute. You must take one of the following actions before you can

delete:

■ Contact any users who are using the attribute to have them remove the

personalization. When you try to delete an attribute that is being used, you

receive an error and a list of users who are currently using the attribute.

To have users delete a personalized attribute, have them navigate to the

list page of the object and select Configure from the Actions drop-down

menu. In the page that appears, the user must click General in the content

menu, then click Restore Defaults.

■ Publish the view. This action automatically removes any end-user

personalization. After you publish, you can delete the attribute.

Important! As a precaution, remove any use of the attribute in a query or in

calculations for attributes before you delete. Deleting an attribute used by a

query or included in a calculation can produce unintended results. Once the

deletion occurs, the only way to retrieve the data is through a database

backup restoration.

To delete an object attribute

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object you want to modify.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

Page 91: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Object Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 91

4. In the list of attributes, check the box next to the attribute you want to

delete and click Delete.

The Confirm Object Attribute Delete page appears.

5. Review the list of associated items and make sure none have dependencies

(queries or other attributes that use the attribute to be deleted).

6. Complete one of the following:

■ If you find dependencies, click No to exit the page, then remove the

dependencies and repeat the procedure to delete the attribute.

■ If no dependencies are listed, click Yes to delete the attribute.

Page 92: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Audit Objects

92 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Audit Objects

You can configure CA Clarity PPM to audit and preserve a record of operations

performed on many CA Clarity PPM objects. When an object is configured for

auditing, instances of the object display an Audit tab when viewed in CA Clarity

PPM.

Note: See the Common Features and Personal Options User Guide for more

information on how to use audit trail.

Note: See the Administration Guide for more information on how to view the

global audit trail.

The Audit Trail features include:

■ Tracking insert, delete, and change operations

You can select the operations and the attributes that you want audited. For

example, you might track changes for a specific risk called "High Defect

Count" that you create and add to a project.

■ Tracking operations for subobjects with the master object

You can configure auditing operations for a subobject like a task. Users can

see the subobject's auditing information from the Audit tab of the

subobject or the master object.

Instance security is enforced on the object's Audit tab. This means that the

user must have the right to view the subobject, or it will not be visible on

the master object's Audit tab.

■ Tracking time varying attributes

Budgeting and resource planning use time varying attributes. You can

configure these attributes to track the history of changes.

■ Global Audit Trail view

Administrators can see a complete log of all insert, delete, and change

records across all objects.

■ Audit Trail maintenance

You can purge unneeded audit records by running the Purge Audit Trail

job. When you configure an object for auditing, you can specify the

number of days records are kept before being deleted. If you do not

indicate the number of days, object records are kept indefinitely.

Note: See the Administration Guide for more information on jobs.

Page 93: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Audit Objects

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 93

To set up an audit trail for an object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object you want to set up for auditing.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Audit Trail from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Audit Trail Attributes page appears.

4. In the Audit Attribute section, highlight the attributes you want to audit for

changes and click the right arrow to place them in the Audited Attributes

list.

5. In the Object Audit section, do the following:

■ Highlight the attributes you want audited for insertions and click the

right arrow to place them in the Logged Attributes for Insert Operation

list.

■ Highlight the attributes you want audited for deletions and click the

right arrow to place them in the Logged Attributes for Delete Operation

list.

6. In the Purge Audit Trail section, enter a number to indicate how many days

a record for this object is to be kept before being purged when the Purge

Audit Trail job is run. Leave the field blank to keep records indefinitely, and

click Save.

The object is set up for audit trail.

Page 94: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Delete Objects

94 Studio Developer's Guide

Delete Objects

Use this procedure to delete user-defined objects. You can delete any object

that you create. To delete an object created by another user, you must have

the appropriate access rights to the object. CA Clarity PPM stock objects

cannot be deleted.

When you delete an object, the following information is deleted from the

database:

■ Object views

■ Object database tables

■ Object page sets

■ Portlets using the object (through an object data provider)

Some object information is not deleted. If you use the object in reports or

reference the object in custom database code, these uses are not deleted.

Some uses of the object in NSQL queries may not be deleted. Although audit

trail records for the object are deleted, a record of the deletion itself is stored

in the Audit Trail log.

Queries that use the database table created for the object are identified so that

they can be removed manually.

Important! As a precaution, remove any use of the object in a query or a

portlet before you delete. Deleting an object used to provide information to

other parts of CA Clarity PPM can produce unintended results. Once the

deletion occurs, the only way to retrieve the data is through a database

backup restoration.

To delete an object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. In the list of objects, check the box next to the object you want to delete

and click Delete.

The Confirm Object Delete page appears.

3. Review the list of associated items and make sure none have dependencies

(portlets or queries).

4. Complete one of the following:

■ If you find dependencies, click No to exit the page, then remove the

dependencies and repeat the procedure to delete the object.

■ If no dependencies are listed, click Yes to delete the object.

Page 95: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Add-Ins

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 95

About Add-Ins

Add-ins are a collection of content, such as portlets, pages, access groups,

processes, reports, and jobs that you can import as a single entity into CA

Clarity PPM. To get started with CA Clarity PPM, you can install, apply, and use

the collection of content that comes with add-ins.

Note: See the Installation Guide for more information on installing add-ins.

Apply Add-Ins

Before an add-in is available for you to use, your CA Clarity PPM administrator

must make it available by applying it to CA Clarity PPM. Before you can apply

an add-in, your CA Clarity PPM administrator must first run the install program

from the command-line on CA Clarity PPM. Once you have applied the add-in,

publish the portlets and views.

Note: See the Installation Guide for more information on installing add-ins.

Note: If you change a CA Clarity PPM object and then apply an add-in to CA

Clarity PPM, your changes will not be overwritten. You can apply the entire

add-in or select just the items you want.

The following list provides a description of the columns on the Add-In Details

page:

Status

Indicates if the add-in item is applied or not in CA Clarity PPM.

Type

Indicates the item type (page, tab, process, group, portlet, query, lookup,

report, job, etc.).

Content

The add-in item's code, which usually becomes the ID of the applied add-in

item.

To apply an add-in during a CA Clarity PPM upgrade installation

1. Select Add-Ins from the CA Clarity PPM Studio menu, and select the add-in

from which you want to apply items.

The Add-In Details page appears.

2. Review each selected item and accept only those changes you want. Only

those items you select are updated.

Page 96: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

96 Studio Developer's Guide

Note: If a selected item has dependencies on other items, the other items

will also get updated.

3. Click Apply.

Views

An object's view determines how information displays on a page. There are

three types of views:

List Filter View

This view is a section that appears at the top of a list column view and

allows users to search for information.

List Column View

This view displays information about object instances in rows and columns.

Properties View

This view displays and allows users to enter information about an object.

Add User-Defined Fields to Views

You can add user-defined fields to property, list filter, and list column views.

Page 97: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 97

Add Fields to an Object's Properties View

To add a field to an object's Properties view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object's name.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Locate the properties view that you want to work with and click [Layout:

Edit] from the Setup column in that row.

The Property Layout page appears.

5. In the Property Layout hierarchy, select the section to which you want to

add the field, and click the Properties and Layout icon next to the item.

The Section Properties page appears.

6. In the Available list, click the name of the field you want to add to the

page.

7. Click the Add Field (right arrow) button to move the field to the desired

column.

8. Click Submit.

Add Fields to an Object's List Filter View

List Filter views display on CA Clarity PPM list pages to help users filter the list.

A list filter view can appear in a ―collapsed‖ state where only the filter field

displays, or in an expanded state so that users can see many filter options.

Use the List Filter Layout page to add fields to an object‘s list filter view.

When you set up list filter views you can choose to display a Build Power filter

link that users can click to build and save complex queries.

Example

If a user enters two or more terms into a regular filter box (for example ―John

Adam‖), normally CA Clarity PPM would assume that this is an AND operation

and would only provide ―John Adam‖ in the results. With Power Filters, the

user can select a variety of operators including OR and select which fields to

search in. With Power Filters the user could also return results that have

―John‖ or ―Adam‖ and not necessarily both.

Page 98: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

98 Studio Developer's Guide

See following a sample page that displays an object with an expanded list filter

view (in the filtering section above) and a list column view (in the section

below).

To add a field to an object's list filter view

1. Select Objects from the CA Clarity PPMStudio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object category whose List Filter view you want to add a field.

Note: The categories that appear depend upon how your CA Clarity PPM

application was configured.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Next to the List Filter category, click Layout.

The List Filter Layout page appears.

5. In the Available list, select the field to add and click the right arrow (Add

Field) button to move the field to the desired column.

6. Repeat until the fields you want to display are listed in the correct column.

7. Complete the following fields in the Settings section:

Section Title

Determines the name of the filter section's title bar.

Default Filter State

Determines how the filter displays initially. Select Collapsed to display

only one filter field or select Expanded to display multiple filter options

for the user.

Allow Power Filter

Determines whether the Build Power Filter link is available to the user

to build power filters. Select the box to display the link to the user.

Page 99: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 99

8. Click Submit.

The Applications page filter section now shows the effects of the options

you have selected.

9. Click Publish to replace personalized changes that users have made to this

view.

Note: This replaces any modifications that users have made to their

personal views.

Add Fields to an Object's List Column View

Use the following procedure to add fields to List Column views. You can also

add virtual fields that don't represent data in the database, but are derived

from other data fields. You can use these virtual fields to display aggregations,

comparisons, and variances. You can create many aggregation rows for a grid.

Use the Configure: List Column Layout page to add fields to an object‘s list

column view.

See following a sample page that displays an object with an collapsed list filter

view (hidden from view) and a list column view displaying a list of applications.

To add a field to an object's list column view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object in which you want to display the field.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Next to the List Column view you want to add a field, click Layout.

The Configure: List Column Layout page appears.

5. In the Available Columns list, select the field you want to add.

Page 100: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

100 Studio Developer's Guide

6. Click the right-arrow to move the field to the Selected Columns list.

7. Click Submit.

8. Next to List Column view, click Options, then set any of the following

options:

Secondary Value Display

Select one of the options to show the secondary (alternative) value

when the user moves the cursor over the field. To show the secondary

when the value is null, select the "Show Secondary Null Values" check

box.

Filter

Select an option to indicate whether filter results are shown

automatically or shown only after a filter operation is performed.

Rows per Page

From the drop-down list, select the number of rows to display for this

view.

Highlight Row by Attribute

When the value entered here is not zero, the row is highlighted.

Display Currency Code in Column

This check box controls the display of currency codes (for example,

USD) in investment grids. If multiple currencies are used, this option is

selected by default and the check box cannot be cleared.

If you clear the check box when a single currency is used, the currency

code displays in a legend below the grid.

Allow Configuration

When you select this option, users can see the Configure option in the

Actions field drop-down list.

Allow Label Configuration

This option works in conjunction with the Allow Configuration option. If

you select the Allow Configuration option and you clear the Allow Label

Configuration option, field labels become unavailable for configuration

while other items can still be configured.

Attribute Value Protection

Select an option to protect or display attribute values in the list. You

can protect attributes using display conditions and secured subpages

or secured subpages only, or you can display all attribute values.

9. Submit your changes.

Page 101: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 101

Add Aggregation Rows for Number Fields

Use this procedure if you have number or money fields, and you want to show

aggregations for these rows. Use the Aggregation Row Properties page to add

aggregation rows for number fields.

If you add more than one aggregation row, you can change the order in which

they appear in the view. The view‘s aggregation rows display on the Configure:

List Aggregation page.

To add aggregation rows for number fields

1. Select Objects from the Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object to which you want to add an aggregation row.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Next to the List Column view containing number fields for which you want

to add an aggregation row, click Aggregation.

The Configure: List Aggregation page appears.

5. Do the following for each aggregation row you want to add:

a. Click Add.

The Aggregation Row Properties page appears.

b. Complete the following fields:

■ Label, enter a name for the aggregation row.

■ Select the Show check box to enable the row.

■ At Attribute, select the field you want to use.

■ At Function, select the aggregation function you want to use to

calculate values in the row:

Page 102: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

102 Studio Developer's Guide

– Aggregation Function. Select the aggregation function to use;

choose from Sum, Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, Standard

Deviation, or Variance

– Threshold Aggregation Function. Select the aggregation

function to use; choose Sum, Average, Count, Maximum,

Minimum, Standard Deviation, or Variance.

– Comparison Column. Select the column to compare with this

one.

– Comparison Column Aggregation Function. Select the

aggregation function to use; choose Sum, Average, Count,

Maximum, Minimum, Standard Deviation, or Variance.

– Display. Select the manner in which to display the data; choose

Number, Column Graph, or Bar Graph, and then click Save.

c. Click Submit.

The Configure: List Aggregation page appears.

Page 103: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 103

Change the Order of Aggregation Rows

Use this procedure if you have added more than one aggregation row to a view

and want to change the order in which they appear. The view‘s aggregation

rows display on the Configure: List Aggregation page.

To change the order of aggregation rows

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object to which you want to add an aggregation row.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Next to the List Column view containing number fields for which you want

to add an aggregation row, click Aggregation.

The Configure: List Aggregation page appears.

5. Click Reorder.

The Reorder Aggregation Rows page appears.

6. Select the row you want to move, and click the up or down arrows to move

it up or down the list.

7. Click Submit.

8. Click Publish to replace personalized changes that users have made to this

view.

This replaces any modifications that users have made to their personal

views.

Set up Multiple Time-varying Fields in List Column Views

You can display multiple time-varying fields in the same list column view. The

data for the fields displays as stacked on the page, with the information for

each time-varying field appearing in the same virtual column. The data that

displays can be in units of money, numbers, or percentages.

An object instance (Phone Replacement Project) in the list view shows two

time-varying values stacked in the same column: Cost of Units Completed

(money) and Number of Units Completed (number).

If you export data to Microsoft Excel, each time-varying value that is stacked

in a CA Clarity PPM virtual column will be allotted an Excel column of its own.

For example, if you have time slices A, B, C, and D with 3 time-varying

attributes configured in a virtual list view column, an export will produce 12

Excel columns: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, C3, D1, D2, and D3.

Page 104: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

104 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Set Up Multiple Time-varying Values

To set up multiple time-varying values in the same column in an object's list

view, you must complete the following basic steps:

1. Create the time-varying attributes you want to include in the list view if

they do not exist already.

2. Configure the list view for the object by doing the following:

a. Creating a time-scaled virtual column. A time-scaled virtual column

can be used to show multiple time periods in the same cell in the

column.

b. Adding the time-varying attributes to the column.

c. Adding the time-scaled virtual column to the object's List Column view

layout.

3. Configure the properties view for the object to show the time-varying

attribute fields and to allow the CA Clarity PPM user to edit the fields and

change values.

4. Set up a time slice request for each time-varying attribute. See the CA

Clarity PPM Administration Guide for complete information on time slice

requests.

5. Run the Time Slicing job. This job can be set up to run on a schedule that

suits your business needs. See the CA Clarity PPM Administration Guide for

complete information on the Time Slicing job.

6. View the time-varying attributes displayed in the time-scaled virtual

column in CA Clarity PPM. To view the time-varying fields, create an

instance of the object and include values for the time-varying attributes in

the Properties page. Results for the values can be seen in the virtual

column on the List page.

Note that the user can edit the fields by entering values for different time

periods.

Configure the List Column View for Multiple Time-varying Fields

This procedure explains how to set up an object's list column view to show

multiple time-varying attributes in the same virtual column.

To configure the list column view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object in the list that appears.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

Page 105: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 105

3. Click Views.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Create the virtual column by doing the following:

a. Click Fields in the object's list view.

The Configure: List Column Fields page appears.

b. Click New.

The Create Virtual List Column page appears.

c. Select Time Scaled Value and click Submit.

d. In the General section, do the following:

■ In the Available list box, select the attributes you want to list in the

column and use the arrow buttons to move the attributes to the

Selected list box.

■ Enter a name for the virtual column in the Column Label field.

■ Select the Allow Editing check box to allow users to make changes

to the fields in the column.

■ Select the Show Legend Column check box to display each

attribute name in the column beside its values.

■ Select the Show Column Label check box to display the column

name at the top of the column.

e. In the Time Scale section, enter the number of time periods that are to

display in the column.

f. Set any other options on the page that apply.

g. Click Submit.

5. Include the column in the object's List view by doing the following:

a. Click Layout in the object's List view.

The Configure: List Column Layout page appears.

b. In the Column Layout section, select the name of the column in the

Available Columns list box and move it to the Selected Columns list

box using the arrow buttons.

c. Set any other options on the page that apply.

d. Click Submit.

6. Click Publish to replace personalized changes that users have made to this

view.

Note: This replaces any modifications that users have made to their

personal views.

Page 106: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

106 Studio Developer's Guide

Use Fields to Sort a List Column View

You can add up to four fields that sort a List Column view. The fields may be

user-defined, stock, or both.

To sort a list column view using a user-defined field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object you want to sort.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Next to List Column view click Layout.

The Configure: List Column Layout page appears.

5. Indicate the primary sort column in the Column Sorting section's First Field

row, select the field.

6. To sort the column in descending order, click Descending.

7. To indicate additional sort columns, repeat Step 5 and Step 6 in the

second, third, and fourth field columns respectively.

8. Click Save.

9. Click Publish to replace personalized changes that users have made to this

view.

Note: This replaces any modifications that users have made to their

personal views.

Page 107: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 107

Create Subpages for the Properties View

You can add a subpage to the properties view of an object. A subpage behaves

like a page when it is displayed, but it allows you to group specific information

that can be defined by the user or displayed for the user.

For example, you can create a subpage for scheduling or financial data. Some

stock objects have subpages included for this type of information.

To see a subpage, you click a link in the content menu that appears on the left

of the parent page.

Page 108: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

108 Studio Developer's Guide

Add a Subpage

To add a subpage to an object's property view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object's name.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Locate the properties view that you want to work with and click [Layout:

Edit] from the Setup column in that row.

The Property Layout page appears.

5. Click Create Subpages.

The Create Subpages page appears.

6. Complete the following fields:

Subpage Name

Identifies the name that will appear in the content menu as a link to

the subpage.

Subpage ID

Identifies the subpage using a unique alphanumeric identifier.

7. Click Submit.

The Property Layout page appears with the new subpage listed.

Page 109: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 109

Define Subpage Properties

You can define the layout of the subpage sections and determine whether the

page is secured against unauthorized access. In addition, you can define the

conditions under which the page does or does not display for all users. You can

secure a subpage so that it displays only if a user has been granted access

rights to view or edit the subpage.

To define subpage properties

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object's name.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Locate the properties view that you want to work with and click [Layout:

Edit] from the Setup column in that row.

The Property Layout page appears.

5. In the Layout section, use the arrow keys to place the sections in the order

you want them to appear on the subpage.

6. In the Properties section, complete the following fields:

Subpage Name

Identifies the subpage in the content menu. You can change the

current name by entering a new name.

Linkable

Indicates that the subpage can have a link on other pages in the

application. Select the check box to allow the subpage to be linked.

Default: Cleared

Secure

Indicates whether the subpage has access rights associated with it.

When this check box is selected, access rights (view and edit) are

generated for the subpage. A user must be granted the access rights

view and edit information on the subpage.

Default: Cleared

7. (Optional) In the Display Conditions section, click [Define display

conditions].

The Display Condition Builder page appears. Use this page to define a set

of conditions that determine when the subpage appears..

8. Click Submit.

Page 110: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

110 Studio Developer's Guide

About the Display Condition Builder

The following table shows the operands that allow you to create a display

condition. You can use the Display Condition Builder to generate the

expression or you can type the expression in the Expression text box.

Operan

d

Function Example

== equals asset.created_by == "marybell"

! not !(asset.created_by == "marybell")

!= not equals asset.created_by != "marybell"

> greater than asset.planned_cst_total > 25000

>= greater than or

equal

asset.planned_cst_total >= 25000

< less than asset.planned_ben_total < 100000

<= less than or equal asset.total_ownership_cost <=

asset.forecast_cst_total

|| or asset.total_ownership_cost > 5000 ||

asset.planned_ben_total > 5000

&& and asset.is_active == 1 &&

asset.planned_cst_total > 50000

like like like( asset.created_by, "marybell" )

notLike not like notLike( asset.created_by, "marybell" )

Use the following rules to manually enter an expression:

■ Place text values in double quotes.

■ The syntax for the object to attribute relationship is object.attribute. For

example, in the expression asset.created_by=="marybell", the object to

attribute relationship is shown in the first half of the expression.

■ The expressions are case sensitive when evaluated. Enter values in the

appropriate case to ensure you get the correct true or false display value.

■ The Negate Expression button makes the entire expression that displays in

the Expression text box negative by enclosing the expression in

parentheses and placing and exclamation symbol before the parentheses.

For example, !(asset.created_by == "marybell").

Page 111: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 111

■ The Add Parentheses button encloses the entire expression in parentheses.

Use parentheses to specify precedence. For example, in the following

expression, asset.created_by != "marybell" || (asset.is_active == 1 &&

asset.planned_cst_total > 50000), the portion of the expression enclosed

in parentheses will be evaluated first. The result of the evaluation will then

be compared with asset.created_by != "marybell".

■ The Evaluate button evaluates the expression in the Expression text box.

Use this button if you enter text manually or modify text you have created

using the Display Condition Builder.

■ The And/Or field is used to create compound expressions in the Expression

text box. After the first expression is entered, this field becomes active so

that you can choose the operand (And or Or) for the second expression.

There are some operations in the Display Condition Builder that you can use

for any object for which you are defining display conditions.

Operation Syntax

Check resource's global

rights

checkGlobalRight(<global right code>,<value to

check>,<operator>)

Check resource's group checkGroup( <group code>, <value to check>,

<operator> )

Check resource's OBS

unit

checkOBSUnit( <OBS path>, <OBS Internal ID>,

<OBS level>, <value to check>, <operator> )

Check resource's

partition

checkOBSUnit( <OBS path>, <OBS Internal ID>,

<OBS level>, <value to check>, <operator> )

If an attribute is linked to a lookup, you can use the following syntax on the

right side of the equation.

Lookup Type Syntax

Numeric lookup( <lookup code>, <internal lookup value

id> )

String lookup( "<lookup code>", "<lookup value

code>" )

Page 112: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

112 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Sections to Subpages

To add a section to a subpage

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object's name.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Locate the properties view that you want to work with and click [Layout:

Edit] from the Setup column in that row.

The Property Layout page appears.

5. Click the name of the subpage you want to add a section to, and click

Create Sections.

The Create Sections page appears.

6. Enter the section name or names you want in the individual text boxes,

and click Submit. The maximum number of sections that you can add at a

time is five.

The Property Layout page appears.

7. Do the following, and then click Submit:

■ To add fields to the section, click the Section icon that appears in the

Section's row.

■ In the Available list, click the name of the field you want to add to the

page.

■ Use the arrow keys to move the field to the appropriate column, then

use the up and down arrow keys to place the field in the proper order

in the list of fields.

Your changes are saved.

Page 113: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 113

Publish Changes to List and Filter Views

You can overwrite list and filter views for CA Clarity PPM users who have

personalized views by publishing new views. A user who has not personalized a

view will see changes in CA Clarity PPM immediately when you make and save

changes to the view in CA Clarity PPM Studio. A user who has personalized the

view will not see changes to the new view until you publish the changes.

If you are using partitions, the new published view affects only the partition

you select.

During a CA Clarity PPM upgrade or when installing add-ins, personalized user

views are not upgraded. To keep users current, you may want to publish any

new views provided by a CA Clarity PPM upgrade or from an add-in.

Note: If upgrade or new system changes to a view's attributes are required for

CA Clarity PPM to operate properly, the changes are merged with the user's

configured view during an upgrade. The merge of required changes with the

user's configured view does not overwrite the user view and does not cause

the view to be marked as upgraded.

The Views option in CA Clarity PPM Studio provides information that lets you

make appropriate decisions about publishing new views. Use the Views page to

publish changes. To access this page, select Views from the CA Clarity PPM

Studio menu.

The Views page shows a list of system views and their current status in CA

Clarity PPM. Custom views are not listed. The following columns on the page

let you assess whether you need to publish a view to users:

View::Code

Identifies the view name. "View" is the nonspecific part of the name and

many views can exist in different partitions or the same partition that have

this portion of the name. "Code" is a name attached in CA Clarity PPM that

identifies the view more specifically. Using the view::code name, object,

category, and partition, each view can be fully identified.

Object

Identifies the object on which the view is created.

Category

Identifies whether the view is a filter, list, or property view.

Type

Identifies whether the view is for the purpose of creating or editing an

instance of an object. Only a property view has data in this column.

Partition

Identifies the partition to which the view pertains.

Page 114: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

114 Studio Developer's Guide

Personalized

Indicates with a check mark that at least one user has configured the view

in the user interface. Publishing a new view or restoring the view default

removes the check mark from this field.

Modified

Indicates with a check mark that changes have been made by an

administrator since the view was originally installed or since the last time

defaults were restored.

Upgraded

Indicates with a check mark that an upgrade has occurred for the view

since its original installation.

Last Restored

Indicates the last date that view defaults were restored. Restoring defaults

overwrites all user and administrator modifications and clears the check

mark from the Modified column.

Last Version

Indicates the last version in which CA Clarity PPM development made

changes to a view. This field is read-only and the version number is

updated only when changes for a view occur in a release.

Note: Only the System partition has its views updated when an upgrade

occurs. If views from other partitions are in the list, the Last Version field

for these views will not show a value.

To publish changes to views

1. Select Views from the CA Clarity PPM Studio menu.

The Views page appears.

2. Select the views that you want to publish to users, and click Publish.

The Restore View Confirmation page appears.

3. Click Yes.

Page 115: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 115

Restore Defaults for an Object's View

This procedure explains how to restore the out of the box CA Clarity PPM

defaults for an object's views. Restoring the defaults for an object's views

causes the properties view, list view, and filter view to be restored to the

original view properties for all users. Any personalized user changes to the

object's view will be overwritten with the defaults. If you are using partitions,

the defaults are restored only in the selected partition.

To restore an object's default views

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object whose views are to be restored to default

values.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Click Restore Defaults to remove all changes (layout, labels, appearance of

fields, and options) made at the administrator level or by users to views in

the current partition.

Restore Defaults for Selected Views

You can restore CA Clarity PPM 's out of the box defaults for multiple views,

including property views, list views, and filter views. When you restore

defaults, any changes made by users or CA Clarity PPM administrators to the

view are overwritten, and the CA Clarity PPM view defaults are restored.

To restore view defaults

1. Select Views from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Views page appears.

2. Select the views to which you want to restore default values.

3. Click Restore Defaults.

The Restore View Confirmation page appears.

4. Click Yes.

Page 116: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

116 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

You can create and use a custom property view to display multiple subpages

on a custom portlet page tab. The custom property view can be used for

custom objects only, not stock CA Clarity PPM objects. You can display the

subpage links on the tab using one of the following options:

■ A content menu with links that display on the left side of the tab.

■ Subtab links that appear at the top of the tab. A subtab can also have a

content menu with links to additional subpages.

The process for displaying multiple subpages on multiple tabs using custom

property views includes the following basic steps:

1. Create a custom property view.

The custom property view defines a set of subpages and the content that

appears on each subpage.

2. Define the display of custom subpage links that appear on a custom portlet

page tab by selecting the appropriate custom property view.

Define and Manage a Custom Property View

A custom property view can only be created on the System partition. Once

created, the property view applies to all child partitions. Only the Layout:Edit

option under Setup in the Views definition is available for a custom property

view. The following sections explain how to create and manage custom

property views.

Page 117: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 117

Create a Custom Property View

A custom property view can only be created for a custom object.

To create a custom property view

1. Open the custom object from the Studio menu by clicking Objects and

selecting the custom object from the list page that appears.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

2. Click Views in the content menu on the left.

3. Click New.

4. Enter the name of the new property view and a unique ID.

5. Click Save.

The new property view is added to the Object Definition:Views list page.

Add Subpages to a Custom Property View

You can add five sub-pages at a time to a custom property view. The number

of sub-pages you can add to a property view is unlimited.

To add subpages to a custom property view

1. On the Object Definition: Views list page, locate the custom property view

and click [Layout:Edit] in the Setup column.

The Property Layout page appears.

2. Click Create Subpages.

3. Enter a name and ID for each subpage you want to create and click

Submit.

The Property Layout page appears showing the new subpages.

4. Populate the subpages with sections and attributes, and set up display

conditions, if needed.

Page 118: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

118 Studio Developer's Guide

Move Subpages Between Property Views

If you have multiple property views, you may need to move subpages from

one property view to another. This allows you to quickly change which view

data is displayed for a tab. Note that you can move subpages between stock

and custom property views.

To move subpages between property views

1. Locate the custom property view on the Object Definition: Views list page

and click [Layout: Edit].

The Property Layout page appears.

2. Select the check box next to the subpages you want to move to another

property view, and click Move.

The Move Subpages page appears.

3. Select the option next to the property view you want to move the

subpages to, and click Move.

The Property Layout page reappears showing the subpage list without the

moved subpages.

4. Click Back.

The Object Definition: Views list page appears.

5. Click [Layout: Edit] in the row of the property set (view) you moved the

subpages to.

The moved subpages are listed in the Property Layout page.

Page 119: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 119

Delete Subpages from Custom Property Views

If a subpage is associated with a subobject, it cannot be deleted from a

property view. In this case, you can move the subpage to another property

view.

To delete a subpage from a property view

1. Open the custom object from the CA Clarity Studio menu by clicking

Objects and selecting the custom object from the list page that appears.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

2. Click Views in the content menu on the left.

3. Locate the custom property view on the Object Definition: Views list page

and click [Layout: Edit].

The Property Layout page appears showing the subpages for the view.

4. Select the check box next to the subpage or subpages you want to delete

and click Delete.

A confirmation page appears asking if you want to delete the selected

subpages.

5. Click Yes.

Delete Custom Property Views

The following rules apply to deleting a custom property view:

■ Subpages linked to a subobject associated with the custom property view

must be moved to another property view before the custom property view

can be deleted. Note that subpages linked to a subobject cannot be

deleted.

■ You cannot delete a custom property view if it is associated with a custom

tab or a portlet page subtab. You must remove all associations before a

check box appears that allows you to select the view for deletion.

■ You can only delete a custom property view from the System partition.

■ When you delete a custom property view from the System partition, the

view is also deleted from child partitions.

To delete a custom property view

1. Open the custom object from the CA Clarity Studio menu by clicking

Objects and selecting the custom object from the list page that appears.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

2. Click Views in the content menu on the left.

3. Select the custom property view you want to delete and click Delete.

Page 120: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

120 Studio Developer's Guide

Restore Defaults for a Custom Property View

You can restore the defaults for a custom property view just as you can for

other views. Restoring the defaults reinstates the original view properties for

all users. Any personalized user changes to the view will be overwritten with

the defaults.

Note: The Restore Defaults button does not display if the custom property

view is associated with a portlet page tab or a subtab.

Display Custom Subpage Links on a Tab Using the Custom Property View

You can display links for subpages on a tab in one of the following ways:

■ In a content menu on the left side of the tab

■ In a set of subtabs below the name of the tab

■ In a combination of content menus and subtabs which also contain content

menus

Prerequisite

To display custom subpages on a tab, the page that the tabs are associated

with must have a Type value that is equal to the custom object on which the

custom view and subpages were created. The Type value is assigned when a

page is created. If the Type value for the page you are adding subpages to is

not equal to the object on which you created the custom views, create a new

page and make the Type value equal to the custom object.

Display Subpage Links in a Tab's Content Menu

To display custom subpage links in a tab's content menu

1. In the CA Clarity Studio menu, click Portlet Pages.

The Pages page appears with a list of pages.

2. Click the name of the page you want to add a new tab to.

The Page: Properties page appears.

3. Click Tabs in the content menu.

The Page: Tabs page appears with a list of tabs that appear on the page.

4. Click New.

The Tab: Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Tab Name

Indicates the name that will appear on the tab in the user interface.

Page 121: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Display Multiple Subpages on a Tab

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 121

Tab ID

Indicates an internal identifier for the tab. Enter a unique alphanumeric

string.

Content Source

Indicates the origin of the content for the data on the tab. Select a

source from the drop-down menu.

6. In the Layout field, select Properties.

The View field appears directly below the Layout field.

7. In the View field, select the custom view with subpages you want to

appear on the content menu of the tab.

Note: For information purposes, the individual subpages are listed out for

each view with the subpages in parentheses. The subpage you select is the

default that displays for the view when you click the tab.

8. Click Save and Exit.

9. View the changes in the application.

Display Subpage Links as Subtabs on a Tab

To display subpage links as subtabs

1. In the CA Clarity Studio menu, click Portlet Pages.

The Pages page appears with a list of pages.

2. Click the name of the page you want to add a new tab to.

The Page: Properties page appears.

3. Click Tabs in the content menu.

The Page: Tabs page appears with a list of tabs that appear on the page.

4. Click New.

The Tab: Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Tab Name

Indicates the name that will appear on the tab in the user interface.

Tab ID

Indicates an internal identifier for the tab. Enter a unique alphanumeric

string.

Content Source

Indicates the origin of the content for the data on the tab. Select a

source from the drop-down menu.

Page 122: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Links for Pages and Subpages

122 Studio Developer's Guide

6. In the Layout field, select Subtab.

The View field appears directly below the Layout field.

7. In the View field, select the custom view with subpages you want to

appear on the content menu of the tab.

Note: For information purposes, the individual subpages are listed out for

each view with the subpages in parentheses. The subpage you select is the

default that displays for the view when you click the tab.

8. Select Save and Continue.

The Tab: Subtabs page appears. Use this page to define subtabs.

9. Click New.

A new row appears where you can define additional subtabs.

10. Complete the following actions:

a. Enter a name in the Subtab field and a unique identifier in the Action

Code field.

b. Select a property set (view) from the Property Set drop-down list.

The property view you select appears in the content menu on the

subtab. If you do not want subpages to appear in the subtab content

menu, select General.

c. Click Save.

11. Click Exit.

12. View the changes in the application.

Links for Pages and Subpages

You can link to many object pages, such as Property, Overview, Process Flow

Layout, Budget/Forecast, Staff/Task Properties, Advanced Resource Search,

XDM forms, and documents.

You can create the following types of links to and from object pages:

■ Designate a page as a subpage so that you can create a link from an

object's pages to its subpages.

■ Add fields to object attributes that link (URL) to web pages.

■ Use a consistent URL format to link to the properties page of an object

instance record (stock or custom) from an external application.

Page 123: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Links for Pages and Subpages

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 123

Link from an Object Page to a Subpage

Use this procedure to designate a page in CA Clarity PPM as a subpage so that

you can provide a link to it.

To add a new link to an object

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the link.

3. Click Linking from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Linking page appears.

4. Click New.

The Link Settings page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Link Name

Enter a name for the link.

Link ID

Enter a unique ID.

Description

Enter a description of the link.

Action

Select the page to display when the user clicks this link.

6. Depending upon the action you chose above, you will be asked to select

values for fields that the subpage has in common with this object. Both

objects must have these values in common for linking to work.

7. Click Submit.

Link from an Object Attribute to a Web Page

A link field provides a link to a URL (web page) outside of CA Clarity PPM.

To add a link field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object to which you want to add the link.

Page 124: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Links for Pages and Subpages

124 Studio Developer's Guide

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click New.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Attribute Name

Enter the name of the new field.

Attribute ID

Enter a unique ID for the field.

Note: This code must contain only alphanumeric characters and the

underscore (_) character and it must also not be a SQL reserved word.

Once you save a field, you cannot change the ID.

Description

Enter a brief description of the field.

Data Type

Choose URL.

Note: Once you save a field, you cannot change the data type.

Default Value

Enter the value you that you want to appear as a default value for the

field.

Maximum Length

Enter the field's maximum length. The maximum size of a string field is

1000 characters.

■ To automatically populate existing objects with the Default Value,

check Populate Null Values with the Default.

■ To require that users enter a value into this field, check Value

Required.

■ To require that this field always appears in the user's Edit

Properties view and cannot be removed, check Presence Required.

■ To prevent users from changing the value of this field, check

Read-Only.

Note: A read-only field must have a Default Value assigned.

6. Click Save.

Page 125: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Links for Pages and Subpages

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 125

Link to Properties Pages from External Applications

You can link to the properties page of an object instance record (stock or

custom) in CA Clarity PPM from external applications using a consistent URL

format. You can use any unique attribute value to identify the object instance

and view its properties page. The action is consistent for all objects (stock,

custom, or sub object).

The following is an example of the URL format that you can use to reference

the stock object, project:

http://someclarity.somebiz.com/niku/app?action=odf.customObjectInstance&odf_code=project&unique_cod

e=myamazingproject

The relevant URL parameters are described below:

odf_code=project

Defines the stock object definition ID as defined in the administration

pages. In the above example, project is the code for the Project stock

object.

unique_code=myamazingproject

Determines how the object instance is retrieved. The parameter name

unique_code identifies the name of the unique attribute on the object

which in turn identifies the object instance that you want to reference. The

parameter name you use here depends solely on the object that you want

to reference as identified by the odf_code parameter described earlier. In

the above example, the object is Project, and unique_code is used to

identify a project instance with the unique_code value of

myamazingproject.

The following is an example of the URL format that you can now use to

reference a custom object, BPM Department:

http://someclarity.somebiz.com/niku/app?action=odf.customObjectInstance&odf_code=custom_workflow&re

lease=1.0.1A

The relevant parameters in the above URL are described below:

odf_code=custom_workflow

Defines the custom object definition ID as defined in the Studio object

administration pages. In the above example, custom_workflow is the code for

the Custom Workflow custom object.

release=1.0.1A

Defines a custom string attribute Release on a custom object Custom Workflow

with object code custom_workflow where the release is 1.0.1A.

Note: URLs with properly escaped parameter values will work as valid

URLs. For example, if you use the attribute ―name‖ with the value ―My Green

Items‖, the URL is constructed as ‗...name=My%20Green%20Items‘.

Page 126: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Add Image Fields to List Column Views

126 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Image Fields to List Column Views

You can use image fields to display information as Gantt charts, icons, image

links, or progress bars on List Column views.

Example

On the Projects list page, users can click the name of the project (link) to open

the project. Users can also view the general project Gantt from this page.

Add Gantt Chart Fields to List Column Views

Gantt charts show duration and progress over time. CA Clarity PPM

automatically displays new virtual fields in the far right column of the list. You

can move the virtual field to a different position in the List Column layout.

To add a Gantt chart field to a list column view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object name to which you want to add the chart.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. In the List Column View row, click Fields.

5. Click New.

6. Select Gantt.

7. Click Submit.

8. In the Time Scales section:

a. At Column Label, enter a label for the top of the list column.

b. At Start Date, enter the start date in one of three ways:

■ Select Specific Date, then enter a date into the box, or click the

Calendar icon and choose a date.

■ Select Rolling Date, then select the period to include.

c. At Time Scale, select the time values to show across the top of the

chart (e.g. Day, Week, Month, etc.).

d. At Number of Time Periods, enter the number of time periods to be

displayed in the chart.

Page 127: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Add Image Fields to List Column Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 127

e. (Optional) At Time Period Offset, enter the number of time periods if

you want to shift the beginning of the Gantt bar relative to the Start

Date.

Note: Use this option only if you also enter a Start Date.

f. At Show Group Header Row, enter the Year, Quarter, Month, or

Week (if you want to display a timescale above the Gantt bar).

g. At Column Width, enter the percentage of the view's width that

should be allocated to the Gantt chart column.

9. Define the primary bar of the Gantt chart:

a. At Item Name Attribute, select the attribute for the primary bar.

b. At Start Date Attribute, select the date field to use for the beginning

of the bar.

c. At Finish Date Attribute, select the date field to use for the end of

the bar.

d. At Milestone Attribute, select the field to use for milestones.

Note: If this field contains a non-zero value, the Gantt chart displays a

diamond.

e. At Progress Through Date Attribute, select a date field to use to

indicate when work is complete.

Note: If you choose a Progress Through Date Attribute, it overrides

the Progress Percent Attribute.

f. At Progress Percent Attribute, specify the percentage of the bar's

length that the progress line shall be.

g. At Color Attribute, select the bar's color.

h. At Show Mouseover, select the values that will appear when the user

moves a cursor over the bar. Choose from Item Name, Start Date,

Finish Date, Progress Through Date, and Progress Percent.

10. (Optional) To display a second bar below the primary bar (for comparison

purposes), check the Show Secondary Bar box and repeat Step 9 above in

the secondary bar section.

11. Click Save.

Page 128: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Add Image Fields to List Column Views

128 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Image Link Fields to List Column Views

You can add an image link that when clicked links the user to another page.

For example, in a Project List Column view, when a user clicks the Document

Manager icon, the page for the project's document manager functions appear.

When you add image link fields to a list column view, CA Clarity PPM

automatically displays the new virtual field in the far right column of the list.

You can move the virtual field to a different position in the List Column layout.

To add an image link field to a list column view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object name to which you want to add the field.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. In the list column view's row, click Fields.

The Configure: List Column Fields page appears.

5. Click New.

The Create Virtual List Column page appears.

6. For the Display Type, select Image, and click Submit.

7. Click Submit.

The List Column Field page appears.

8. Complete the following fields:

Column Label

Enter a label to display at the top of the list column.

Show Column Label

Make sure this option is selected.

Image

Select an image to display.

Link

Select the page to display when the user clicks the image.

Open as Pop-up

Select this option to have the page appear in a pop-up window.

9. Click Submit.

Page 129: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Add Image Fields to List Column Views

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 129

Add Progress Bar Fields to List Column Views

Use the following procedure to add a progress bar field to a list column view.

Progress bars show progress over time. Use the Progress Bar Column Settings

page to add progress bar fields to list column views.

CA Clarity PPM automatically displays the new virtual field in the far right

column of the list. You can move the virtual field to a different position in the

List Column layout.

To add a progress bar field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object name to which you want to add the progress bar.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

4. In the list column view's row, click Fields.

The Configure: List Column Fields page appears.

5. Click New.

The Create Virtual List Column page appears

6. Click Progress Bar and then click Submit.

The Progress Bar Column Settings page appears.

7. Complete the following fields:

Column Label

Enter a label to display at the top of the list column.

Show Column Label

Click display the column label.

Current Stage Name

Select an attribute for each stage in the Progress Bar (this displays at

below the column label).

Current Stage Number

Select an attribute for the current stage.

Number of Stages

Select the attribute that defines the total number of stages in the bar.

Page 130: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Change Field Properties

130 Studio Developer's Guide

Color Attribute

select the attribute that determines the color of each stage.

Show Label

Click display the name of the current stage in the Progress Bar.

Column Width

Enter a number that indicates the percentage of the list's width is

allocated to the Progress Bar column.

8. Click Submit.

Change Field Properties

You can change a user-defined field's properties; for stock CA Clarity PPM

objects and fields, you can only change the display mappings.

Note: To change attribute properties, you will need the Administration - Studio

access right.

To change user-defined field properties

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the name of the object that contains the field that you want to

change.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the name of the attribute that you want to change from the list.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. Change any of the following items:

Properties You Can

Change

Comments

Date range validation Applies only to new records.

Decimal Places You can only increase the value of this

attribute.

Default Value The default value to display.

Description A description of the field.

Page 131: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Change Field Properties

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 131

Properties You Can

Change

Comments

Formula fields These fields retain existing calculated values

and change only when you edit the Formula

field and save it.

Links Links that when clicked, display other CA

Clarity PPM pages.

Lookup field default value You can't change the Lookup or change the

lookup type to Multi-valued. You can, however,

change the default value used when the Lookup

is updated.

Maximum Length You can only increase the value of this

attribute.

Name The name of the field.

Numeric Range Validation Applies only to new records.

Presence Required Defines whether the field must appear.

Risk Only the formula can be changed.

Show as Percent If you change this property, only new values

are shown as a percent.

Unique You can change a field from unique to

non-unique, but not vice versa.

Value Required status You can change a field from required to

non-required, but not vice versa.

6. Click Submit.

Your changes are saved and the Object Definition: Attributes page

appears.

7. To see your changes, click the field's name again.

8. Click Exit.

Page 132: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

132 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Change a Field's Appearance

This section describes the appearance changes you can make to fields. You

can:

■ Change an object's Display Mapping

You can have various data represented by different colors or icons. These

colors are defined in each field's (attribute) definition page and indicates

the color to display for each range of data. For example you can indicate

that the numbers one through five display in red while values between 6

and 10 display in green.

■ Use icons to represent ranges of values

This technique is commonly used on List Column views. Studio provides a

set of icons that you can choose to display such as a yellow checkmark,

discussion bubbles, attachment icons, and envelope and lock icons.

■ Change field labels, hints, tooltips, default values, and if entry is

required

You cannot change the field's attributes or the data type, but depending

upon the field's data type, you can sometimes change the Display Type.

You can place a hint above or below a field.

■ Display data as bar or column graphs

If you are using number, formula, or money fields in a List Column view,

you can display the data as bar or column graphs. Column graphs are like

bar graphs, except that they are oriented up-and-down instead of

left-to-right. You can add a stacked bar to bar graphs that start at the

right end of the primary bar. You might do this, for example, in the

Primary Column to show cost to date and in the Secondary Column for cost

remaining.

Note: Any changes you make to the field appearance affect only that

particular view. You can set different appearance options for the same field in

different views.

Page 133: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 133

Change Field Labels

The label that is displayed for a field or column does not have to be the actual

field name. You can change the label of a stock or user-defined field. The same

field can also appear with a different label in different views.

Use the Object Definition: Property Fields page to modify a view's field label.

To change the field label

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object whose field label you want to change.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears by default.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. Find the property view that you want to change, then click Fields next to

that view.

The Object Definition: Property Fields page appears.

5. In the Property Label row, find the field whose label you want to change

and enter a new name.

6. Click Submit.

Display a Range of Values as a Color or Icon

You can use icons and color in a list column to indicate a range of values. This

allows you to visually flag specific information so that a list can be scanned

quickly.

This feature allows you to:

■ Choose where the image is placed, either before or after the content

■ Map the image to any attribute available from the data provider, not just

the attribute being rendered in the field

■ Set up an unlimited number of images for a list column

You cannot use this feature in virtual columns that contain Gantt charts,

progress bars, time sliced values, or virtual images.

Page 134: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

134 Studio Developer's Guide

Note: You can only map a display image for those attributes whose data type

is "Number."

To display a range of values as a color or icon

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object whose field you want to change.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears by default.

3. Click Attributes from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Attributes page appears.

4. Click the attribute for which you want to display an image.

The Object Attribute page appears.

5. In the Display Mappings section, to represent the range of values as:

■ a color, at Type choose Color. Then select a color from the drop-down

list to represent the information.

■ an icon, at Type choose Icon. Then click the Browse icon and select the

icon to use to represent the range of values.

6. Complete the following fields in the section:

Description

Enter a description for the range of values.

From

Enter the beginning value for the range.

To

Enter the ending value for the range.

7. If you are creating more than one image for an attribute (for example, a

green icon, yellow icon, and red icon for different statuses), repeat

Complete the following fields in the section: as many times as necessary.

8. Click Submit.

Change the Appearance of Properties View Attributes

To change the appearance of a properties view attributes

1. Select Views from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Views page appears.

Page 135: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 135

2. Click the code name of the properties view whose field you want to

change.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

3. In the Properties category row, click Fields.

The Object Definition: Property Fields page appears.

4. Click the Properties icon next to the field you want to change.

The Property Field page appears.

5. Change any of the following options (the options that appear depend on

the field's data and display type):

Attribute

Read-only. Displays the name of the field.

Property Label

Defines the label for the field.

Note: To translate the label into another language, click the Translate

icon and enter text in another language. If you do not see the

Translate icon, try clicking Save.

Display Type

This field displays for date data type fields. Specifies how you want the

date to display.

Values: Date, Date and Time

Default: Date

Hint

Enter a message that helps the user use the field. The maximum

length of this field is 512 characters.

Hint Position

Indicates where the hint appears in context with the field.

Values: Above or Below

Default: Below

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

Width

Enter the number of characters allowed for the text entry box.

Attribute Default

Enter the default value for this field.

Page 136: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

136 Studio Developer's Guide

Override Default

Enter a new default value for new records created through this view.

Attribute Default Date

Enter the default date for this field.

Override Default Date

Specifies the default date.

Values:

■ Rolling Date.

■ Specific Date.

Value Required

Check this box to require that users enter a value.

Enter Once

Check this box to prevent users from changing this field's value after it

has been entered.

Hidden

Check this box to prevent the field from displaying on user views. Use

hidden fields to add data that is used in calculations but does not

display on the page. When you add hidden attributes to properties

views, they will not appear to the user. You must define a default for

hidden attributes.

Height

Enter the number of lines allowed for a text area box.

6. Click Submit.

Change the Appearance of List Column View Fields

Before you can see the changes that you make to list column view fields, you

must add it to the List Column layout.

To change the appearance of a list column view field

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object whose field appearance you want to change.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

Page 137: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 137

4. In the List Column category row, click Fields.

The Configure: List Column Fields page appears.

5. Click the Properties icon in the row that contains the field whose

appearance you want to change.

The List Column Field page appears.

6. Change any of the following options (the options that appear depend on

the field's data and display type):

Allow Editing

Enables edit mode and allow users to change the field's data.

Alignment

Select:

■ Left, to align the field with the left side of the column,

■ Center, to center align the field in the column, or

■ Right, to align the field with the right side of the column.

Allow Word Wrapping in Column

Check this box to allow field text to wrap when the text is wider than

the column.

Allow Word Wrapping in Column Header

Check this box to allow header text to wrap when the column header is

wider than the column.

Column Label

Enter the name you want to appear for the column.

Column Width

Enter the column size (in pixels).

Decimal Places

Enter the number of decimal places to display for this field.

Page 138: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

138 Studio Developer's Guide

Display Elements

Choose from:

■ Image, to display the field as an image.

■ Value, to display the field as a value.

■ Range Description, a descriptive label to represent the range of

values.

Note: You can choose to display such columns of information as a

value (e.g., 6.4), as a image (such as a green/re/yellow stoplight), as

a range description (e.g. super, fair, awful), or a combination of these

options.

Display Type

Choose:

■ Number to display the field as a number

■ Percent to display the field as a value with a percent sign (for

example, .34% or 34%)

■ Calculated Percent to display the field as a calculated value (100 x

field value) with a percent sign (for example, 34% or 3400%)

■ Column Graph to display the field as a column graph

■ Bar Graph to display the field as a bar graph.

Disable Link Attribute

Select an attribute to indicate whether the value in the Link field

appears in a list or grid as text only or as a hyperlink.

If the value of the attribute selected equals zero, the text in the

corresponding Link field appears as text only. If the value selected in

the field is not zero or if a value is not selected, the value selected in

the Link field appears as a hyperlink.

This field applies only when the Link field has a value selected.

Link

Select a page to display when users click this link. To have the page

display in a pop-up window, check the Open as Pop-up box.

Secondary Value

Select a secondary field's value to display when the user moves a

cursor over the field.

Show Column Label

Check this box to display the column label.

7. Click Submit.

Page 139: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 139

8. Click the Indicator Images icon next to the field whose appearance you

want to change by adding an image.

The List Column Field: Indicator Images page appears.

9. In the Available Images list box, select the image or images you want to

appear in the field and click the Move Image arrow below the list box.

10. Click the Move Image arrows at the bottom of the page to position the

image or images either before or after field content.

11. If you have multiple images, use the up and down arrows to set the order

that the images appear in the field.

12. Click Save and Exit.

Change the Appearance of List Filter View Fields

Before you can see the changes that you make to the appearance of a list filter

view field, you must add it to the List Filter layout.

To change the appearance of a field in a list filter view

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object whose field appearance you want to change.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. In the List Filter category row, click Fields.

The Object Definition: List Filter Fields page appears.

5. Click the Properties icon in the row that contains the field whose

appearance you want to change.

The List Filter Field page appears.

6. Change any of the following options (the options that appear depend on

the field's data and display type). You can choose to display such columns

of information as just the value (e.g., 6.4), as an image (such as a

green/red/yellow stoplight), as a range description (e.g. super, fair, awful),

or a combination of these options.

Filter Label

Enter a new label. To translate the label into another language, click

the Translate icon and then enter the translated text.

Display Type

Select Date or Date Range.

Page 140: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

140 Studio Developer's Guide

Display Elements

Choose from:

■ Image, to display the field as an image.

■ Value, to display the field as a value.

■ Range Description, to enter a descriptive label for the range

values.

Filter Default

Do one of the following:

■ To choose a period to include, select that date from the Rolling

Date drop-down list,

■ Enter a date into the Specific box, or

■ Click the Calendar icon and select a date.

Note: If you choose "Date Range" as the Display Type, the page

redraws to show Filter Default From and Filter Default To options so

that you can set defaults for both ends of the date range.

Required in Filter

Check this box to ensure that the field cannot be removed from the

List Filter layout.

Hidden in Filter

Check this box to make the field appear in the List Filter view, but

invisible to users. Use hidden fields to include data for calculations that

are not displayed.

Read-Only in Filter

Check this box to prevent users from changing the value of this field in

a List Filter view.

Note: If you select this option, the field must have the Filter Default

value set.

Hint

Enter a message to help users use the field. The maximum length of

this field is 512 characters.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves the cursor over

the field.

7. Click Submit.

Page 141: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 141

Display Fields as Bar or Column Graphs

To display a field as a bar or column graph

1. Click Objects from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Objects page appears.

2. Click the object whose field appearance you want to change.

The Object Definition: Properties page appears.

3. Click Views from the content menu.

The Object Definition: Views page appears.

4. On a list column view type row, click Fields.

The Configure: List Column Views page appears.

5. Click the Properties icon in the row that contains the field you want to

change.

The List Column Field page appears.

6. Change any of the following options (the options that appear depend on

the field's data and display type):

Column Label

Enter the name you want to appear for the column.

Show Column Label

Check this box to display the column label.

Allow Word Wrapping in Column Header

Check this box to allow header text to wrap when the column header is

wider than the column.

7. Complete the following fields:

Display Type

Select:

■ Column Graph, to display the field as a column graph, or

■ Bar Graph, to display the field as a bar graph.

Secondary Value

Select the attribute whose value displays when the user moves a

cursor over the primary bar.

Page 142: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

142 Studio Developer's Guide

Alignment

Select:

■ Left, to align the field with the left side of the column,

■ Center, to center align the field in the column, or

■ Right, to align the field with the right side of the column.

Thickness

Choose from the following options:

■ Autofit to fit the graph to the column width.

■ Narrow to display a narrow graph.

■ Medium to display a medium-width graph.

■ Wide to display a wide graph.

Maximum Length

Enter the length of the bar (in pixels).

Length Scaling

Choose from the following options:

■ Relative to Same Column. Use this to make the bar length

proportional to other bars in the same column. This option is most

useful when displaying horizontal bars. For example, the Budget

Cost bar in a row with a value of $500,000 would show as twice

the height of the Budget Cost bar on a row with a value of

$250,000.

■ Relative to Same Row. Use this to make the bar proportional to

all other bars in the same row. This option is most useful when

displaying vertical bars. For example, the Budget Cost bar with a

value of $500,000 would display as twice the height of the Budget

Benefit bar with a value of $250,000.

■ Relative to Entire Table. Use this to make the bar proportional to

all bars of the same type (vertical or horizontal) in the entire table.

For example, in a grid with the Budget Cost column as a vertical

bar and a row with a Budget Cost value of $500,000 would display

as twice the height as the Budget Cost value of $250,000 in

another row.

Page 143: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

How to Change a Field's Appearance

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 143

■ No Scaling. Use this to draw all bars to the maximum length. This

can be used to create progress bars.

For example, you could have an ETC column with actuals as the

threshold value. The part below the threshold shows how much

work is already done; the part above shows how much work

remains to be done. By looking at a column of these bar graphs

you can quickly see how close each task is to being complete

relative to the others.

Color

Select a color for the primary bar.

Threshold Line Attribute

Select an attribute (field) in the same object that holds the threshold

value.

Note: In bar graphs, a vertical line marks the threshold value.

Over-threshold Color

Select a color to represent values greater than the threshold value.

Note: Any portion of the primary bar that extends past the threshold

is drawn in the over-threshold color. Any portion of the secondary bar

that extends past the threshold is drawn in a darker shade of the same

color.

Link

Select a page to display when the user clicks the primary bar. If you

want the page to open in a pop-up window, check the Open as Pop-up

box.

8. (Optional) To create a stacked bar, complete the following fields:

a. Stacked Attribute, select the attribute to be represented as a stacked

bar.

b. Color, select a color for the stacked bar.

c. Secondary Value, select a value to display when the user moves a

cursor over the secondary bar.

9. At Link, select a page to display when the user clicks the secondary bar.

10. Click Submit.

Page 144: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Menus, Sections, and Links

144 Studio Developer's Guide

Menus, Sections, and Links

After you create pages of content, use the following procedures to add menus

and links in the Administration Tool or CA Clarity PPM main menu. You can also

do the following:

■ Rearrange sections and links

■ Move links between sections

■ Rename links and sections

Add Menu Items or Links

Use this procedure to add menu items and links that display pages to the

Administration Tool main menu or the CA Clarity PPM main menu. Main menus

display on the left side of all CA Clarity PPM pages.

To add sections or links to the Administration Tool or to the CA Clarity

PPM main menu

1. Click Menu Manager from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Menu Manager page appears.

2. To add a link to the:

■ Administration Tool, click Administration Tool Menu.

■ CA Clarity PPM application that users see, click Application Menu.

The Menu Hierarchy page appears and displays all sections and links. A

check mark appears in the Active column next to menu items that are

currently activated. System pages are always active.

3. Check the box next to the menu that you want to add a section or link to

and then click Add.

4. Do one of the following, and click Submit:

■ To create a link, click Link.

■ To create a section, click Section.

5. If you are adding a link, complete the following fields:

Link Name

Defines the link's name.

Description

Defines the link's description.

Page 145: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Menus, Sections, and Links

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 145

Page Name

Click the Browse icon and select the page to display when the link is

clicked.

Parent Menu Item

Select the menu in which this link will appear.

6. If you are adding a section:

Section Name

Enter a name.

Section ID

Enter unique section ID.

Description

Enter a description

7. Click Submit.

The Menu Hierarchy page re-appears and includes the items you added.

Change Sections and Links

Use this procedure to change the sections and links that display in the

Administration Tool main menu or the CA Clarity PPM main menu. Main menus

display on the left side of all CA Clarity PPM pages.

To change sections or links in the Administration Tool or CA Clarity

PPM main menu

1. Click Menu Manager from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Menu Manager page appears.

2. To change an item in the:

■ Administration Tool, click Administration Tool Menu.

■ CA Clarity PPM application, click Application Menu.

The Menu Hierarchy page appears and displays all sections and links.

3. Check the box next to the item you want to change.

4. You can do the following:

■ Change a link, click Link.

■ Change a section, click Section.

5. Click Submit.

Page 146: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Menus, Sections, and Links

146 Studio Developer's Guide

6. Change any of the following fields:

Description

Enter a description. (Links only)

Link Name

Enter a name.

Page Name

Click the Browse icon and select the page to display when the link is

clicked.

Parent Menu Item

Select the section in which this menu item will appear. (Sections only)

Section Name

Enter a name.

Section ID

Enter unique section ID.

7. Click Submit.

Move Sections and Links

Use this procedure to move the sections and links that display in the

Administration Tool main menu or CA Clarity PPM main menu. Main menus

display on the left side of all CA Clarity PPM pages.

To move sections or links to the Administration Tool or CA Clarity PPM

main menu

1. Select Menu Manager from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Menu Manager page appears.

2. To change an item in the:

■ Administration Tool, click Administration Tool Menu.

■ CA Clarity PPM application that users see, click Application Menu.

3. The Menu Hierarchy page appears and displays all sections and links.

A check mark appears in the Active column next to the item that is

currently activated. System pages are always active.

4. Click Reorder.

5. At Menu Items, select a section or link and then click the up and down

arrow buttons to move it to another position.

6. Click Submit.

Page 147: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Icons

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 147

Delete Sections or Links

Use this procedure to delete links or sections. You can only delete sections and

links that you created. Sections and links that are provided by CA Clarity PPM

cannot be deleted. If you delete a section or link that a user is currently

viewing, the user is unaffected. The next time the user displays the page,

however the section or links will not appear.

To delete a section or link from the Administration Tool or CA Clarity

PPM main menu

1. Select Menu Manager from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Menu Manager page appears.

2. Select the section or link to delete.

3. Click Remove, then click Yes.

Icons

The following list shows the icons in CA Clarity PPM. You can use these to

create image links:

The detailed resource information icon

The grey diamond icon.

The grid with check mark icon.

The grid with plus icon.

The guideline icon.

The hierarchy icon.

The lock icon.

The OBS Investments icon.

Page 148: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Icons

148 Studio Developer's Guide

The person with list icon.

The project icon.

The resource allocation icon.

The resource finder icon.

The resources icon.

The right arrow with indent icon.

The roles icon.

The scenario investments icon.

The staff icon.

The subproject icon.

Stock Icons

The following list shows the stock icons. You can use these to create image

links

The Attachment icon.

The blue down arrow icon.

Page 149: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Icons

Chapter 3: Configuring CA Clarity PPM (PowerMods) 149

The blue right arrow icon.

The blue right-facing triangle icon.

The blue up arrow icon.

The calendar icon.

The detailed resource information icon.

The discussions icon.

The document manager icon.

The envelope icon.

The exclamation icon.

The green book icon.

The green check mark icon.

The green up arrow icon.

The green down arrow icon.

The green flag icon.

The green right arrow icon.

Page 150: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Icons

150 Studio Developer's Guide

The grey down arrow icon.

The grey right arrow icon.

The grey right facing triangle icon.

The grey up arrow icon.

The list icon.

The process icon.

The properties icon.

The red check mark icon

The red down arrow icon.

The red flag icon.

The red right arrow icon.

The red striped box icon.

The red up arrow icon.

The red x icon.

Page 151: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 151

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs,

Pages, and Menus

This section contains the following topics:

Portlet Overview (see page 152)

Types of Access Rights (see page 152)

Stock Portlets (see page 155)

Graph Portlets (see page 161)

Grid Portlets (see page 174)

HTML Text Portlets (see page 181)

Filter Portlets (see page 185)

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content (see page 202)

Publish Changes to Portlets (see page 209)

Access to Portlets and Pages (see page 209)

Delete Filter Portlets (see page 217)

Page 152: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Overview

152 Studio Developer's Guide

Portlet Overview

Portlets are snapshots into CA Clarity PPM data and can consist of grids,

graphs, or snippets of HTML. You select data to display in the portlet. While

portlets do not replace CA Clarity PPM reports, they can be considered as

mini-reports.

You can create and publish portals across the enterprise. Each portal page is

comprised of a set of portlets—small windows of information presented as

graphs, tables, or web page snippets—that appear automatically on the

desktops of CA Clarity PPM users with the appropriate access privileges. Users

can further personalize their portal pages by deciding which portlets to show or

hide and where to show them on the page.

Portlets obtain information and business intelligence from CA Clarity PPM, from

other databases within the enterprise, and from external sources available in

HTML, such as business news and network status information. Users can

populate portlets with graphs, tables, workflows, best practices, documents,

and forms-all updated and available in real-time without the need to run

reports.

There are four types of CA Clarity PPM portlets:

Graph portlets

Provide graphic views into CA Clarity PPM data, such as pie and line charts.

Grid portlets

Are lists or tables of data that can be filtered on-the-fly.

HTML portlets

Formatted in HTML, these portlets grab web page content and plug it into a

CA Clarity PPM page. Data can be extracted from other internal or external

web sites.

Filter portlets

Coordinate filtering operations between portlets on a page.

Types of Access Rights

The following table describes the types of access rights you can assign:

Page Definition Editor

Change content and page layout (requires Studio Access access rights).

Page Definition Viewer

View only page content and layout (requires Studio Access access rights).

Page 153: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Types of Access Rights

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 153

View Page

View a link to the page on the main menu and then view the page.

Portlet Definition Editor

Change the code and options for a portlet (requires Studio Access access

rights).

Portlet Definition Viewer

View only the portlet code and options (requires Studio Access access

rights).

View Portlet instance

View the portlet and add the portlet to a personal or global page.

Menu Definition Editor - All

Edit and view the definitions of all menus in the Administration Tool.

Menu Definition Viewer - All

View menu definitions in the Administration Tool.

Portlet Definition Editor

Edit and view the portlet definition (requires Studio Access access rights).

Portlet Definition Editor - All

Edit all portlet page definitions in the Administration Tool (requires Studio

Access access rights).

Portlet Definition Viewer

View the portlet definition (requires Studio Access access rights).

Portlet View

View a portlet.

Portlet Creator - Automatic

Edit a portlet (this is automatically granted to a portlet creator).

Portlet Page View

View a general portlet page in CA Clarity PPM. Users do not need this

access right to view instances of portlet pages (such as Portfolio pages).

Portlet Page Creator - Automatic

Edit a portlet page (this access right is automatically granted to the creator

of a portlet page).

Page 154: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Types of Access Rights

154 Studio Developer's Guide

Portlet Page Viewer - All

View all configured portlet pages. This access right is dependent on portlet

pages being linked to a menu before they can be displayed. If the portlet

page is linked to the Administration menu, then the Administration -

Access access right must also be granted.

Portlet Page Definition Editor

Edit, view, and delete a portlet page definition (requires Studio Access

rights).

Portlet Page Definition Viewer

View the portlet page definition in the Administration Tool (requires Studio

Access rights).

Portlet Page Definition Viewer - All

View the all portlet page definitions in the Administration Tool (requires

Studio Access rights).

Portlet Viewer - All

View all portlets and add them to portlet pages.

Object Administration

Access Object Definition pages (requires the Studio module license).

No instance-level access rights exist for queries or for the Menu Manager. You

can grant access rights to specific resources, groups, and OBS units over

specific portlets and pages. If the portlet and page objects are attached to an

OBS, you can assign each portlet and page to an OBS unit, therefore you can

give specific resources, groups, or OBS units access to pages and portlets in

specific OBS units.

In addition to the global access rights, you can grant access rights to individual

pages and portlets on a per instance basis, thereby permitting users to modify

just those portlets or pages for which they have explicit edit access rights.

Page 155: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 155

Stock Portlets

See following a list of stock portlets that you can use. These portlets are

restricted and therefore can‘t be changed. You can however create new

portlets. See the rest of this section for instructions on creating new portlets.

Balance

Balance

ID: Balance

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Benefits by Goal

Benefits by Goal

ID: Benefits by Goal

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Budgeted Costs

Budgeted Costs

ID: Budgeted Costs

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Change Requests

Assigned change requests

ID: Change Requests

Category: Project

Type: General

Cost of Investments

Cost of Investments

ID: Cost of Investments

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: General

Page 156: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Portlets

156 Studio Developer's Guide

Cost/Benefit

Cost/Benefit

ID: Cost/Benefit

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Earned Value History

Earned Value History.

ID: EVHistory

Category: Project

Type: Project

Financials

Financials

ID: Financials

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Gantt

Gantt

ID: Gantt

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

General

General information for a project

ID: project.General

Category: Project

Type: Project

Ideas

Idea portlet

ID: pma.ideaPortlet

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: General

Page 157: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 157

Incident Cost for Investments

Incident cost for investments

ID: Incident Cost for Investments

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: General

Incidents Assigned to My Team

Incidents assigned to my team

ID: Team Incidents

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: General

Investment Health

Investment health

ID: Investment Health

Category: BusinessIntelligence

Type: General

Investments

Investments

ID: Investments

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Issues

Assigned issues

ID: Issues

Category: Project

Type: General

Labor Resource Effort

Labor resource effort for a project.

ID: project.Effort

Category: Project

Type: Project

Page 158: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Portlets

158 Studio Developer's Guide

Life cycle Funnel

Life-cycle funnel

ID: Life-cycle Funnel

Category: Business intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Links

Links defined for a project

ID: project.Links

Category: Project

Type: Project

My Projects

Favorite projects

ID: projmgr.homeHotList

Category: Project

Type: General

Notifications

Summary count of notifications by category

ID: personal.notificationsNuggest

Category: Collaboration

Type: General

Realization

Realization for a project

ID: project.RLZ

Category: Project

Type: Project

Return on Investment

Return on investment for a project

ID: project.ROI

Category: Project

Type: Project

Page 159: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 159

Risk Exposure by Category

Risk exposure by category

ID: Risk Exposure by Category

Category: Project

Type: General

Risk Trends

Risk Trends

ID: Risk Trends

Category: Project

Type: General

Risk/Reward Quadrants

Risk reward quadrants

ID: Risk/Reward Quadrants

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Risks

Assigned risks

ID: Risks

Category: Project

Type: General

ROI/Alignment Zones

ROI/Alignment Zones

ID: ROI/Alignment Zones

Category: Business Intelligence

Type: Portfolio

Subprojects

Subprojects for a project

ID: project.Subprojects

Category: Project

Type: Project

Page 160: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Stock Portlets

160 Studio Developer's Guide

Team Utilization

Displays the team-based utilization for the current project. Provides a

detailed picture of total usage vs. allocation.

ID: projmgr.teamUtilization

Category: Project

Type: Grid

Timesheets to Approve

Timesheets awaiting your approval

ID: projmgr.timesheetAdmin

Category: Resource

Type: General

Unfilled Allocations

Unfilled Allocations

ID: projmgr.unfilledAllocations

Category: Resource

Type: General

Weekly Detail

Weekly detail

ID: projmgr.weeklyDetail

Category: Resource

Type: General

Page 161: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 161

Graph Portlets

You can use graph portlets to display query data in an easy-to-view graphical

format. Before you create a graph, see the topics in this section for a detailed

description of the various types of graph portlets and display options you can

select when creating graphs.

You might use various graph types to display the following types of

information:

■ Pie charts that show the number of projects with low, medium or high risk

■ Pie charts that show revenue by project or OBS unit

■ Scatter graphs that show NPV or ROI per project

■ Bubble graphs that show NPV, ROI, and cost per project

■ Line graphs that show resource capacity over time

Data Providers

Data providers, the source of grid and graph portlet data, are special data

constructs that can be accessed directly with portlets or through queries.

Data provider types are Queries, Objects, and System.

Queries

CA Clarity PPM provides a query language called NSQL, that is similar to

SQL, that you can use to create queries. If you are not familiar with SQL,

you can still create portlets using the built-in data providers that come

with CA Clarity PPM.

Objects

The stock CA Clarity PPM objects—and any objects you create—contain

fields that you can use to access database information.

System

System types are data providers for the restricted portlets. You can use

these data providers in addition to stock CA Clarity PPM objects.

System Type Description

Booking Status List Used with the Team object to list data about

requests for project resources or roles.

Investments This provides combined data for investment types

(Projects, Assets, Applications, Products, and

Other Investment).

Page 162: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

162 Studio Developer's Guide

System Type Description

Key Tasks This is a subset of the Task object and contains

data about key tasks.

Organizer Tasks This provides data about the tasks to which a

resource is assigned.

Portfolios This contains portfolio data.

Programs This contains data about programs and the

projects which belong to a program.

Project Team Members This contains data about resources assigned to

projects.

Project Team Selection This contains data about resources assigned to

projects.

Resource's Projects List This lists data about projects to which a resource

is assigned.

Graph Portlet Types

There are several graph portlet types that you can create in CA Clarity PPM.

Use the graph type that best suits the metrics in your query data. The graph

type you select should not have fewer metrics than the minimum number of

metrics in your query data.

Graphs are best for displaying data that contains several dimensions and

metrics.

■ Dimensions are related data elements. For example, project-related data

(Project ID, name, start date, etc.) is a dimension of data. If a query data

also contains resource data, then the data contains two dimensions.

■ Metrics are query values that can be measured. For example, "Actual

Hours" is a metric.

Graph Type

One-dimensional Multi-dimensional

Description Min.

Metrics

Max.

Metrics

Min.

Metrics

Max.

Metrics

Bar Displays each dimension of

the data in a horizontal bar.

1 Unlimited 1 1

Bubble Displays metrics on the

horizontal and vertical axes.

Also provides data points on

the radius to control data

3 3 3 3

Page 163: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 163

Graph Type

One-dimensional Multi-dimensional

Description Min.

Metrics

Max.

Metrics

Min.

Metrics

Max.

Metrics

point size that is based on a

third metric.

Column Displays each dimension of

the data in a vertical bar.

1 Unlimited 1 1

Funnel Displays the data‘s dimension

objects in proportional

―slices‖, like a pie chart,

except the greatest values

appear in the largest area of

the funnel.

1 1 Not

Available

Not

Available

Line Displays data points that are

connected by lines along the

axes.

1 Unlimited 1 1

Pie Displays the data‘s dimension

objects in proportional

―slices‖.

1 1 Not

Available

Not

Available

Scatter Displays metrics across the

x-axis and y-axis.

2 2 2 2

Page 164: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

164 Studio Developer's Guide

Create Graph Portlets

Use this procedure to create a graph portlet. Before you perform this

procedure:

■ Make sure that you have created a query that will provide data for the

portlet.

■ Decide which type of graph you want to create based upon the metrics and

dimensions in your query data.

To create a graph portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click New.

The Create Portlet page appears.

3. At Portlet Type, select Graph, and click Submit.

The Graph Portlet: General page appears.

4. Complete the following fields:

Portlet Name

Enter the name of the portlet.

Portlet ID

Enter a unique ID for the portlet.

Content Source

Select the content source to use for the portlet data.

Category

Select a category for the portlet.

Description

Enter a description.

Base Size

Choose the base size for the portlet. Choices are Small, Medium, or

Large.

The base size determines the size of the graph portlet. For instance, if

you plan on using a single graph portlet on a personalizable page, you

might select Large. If the portlet will share a page with many other

portlets, you might select Small.

Page 165: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 165

Active

Check this to allow users to see the portlet. (If you leave this

unchecked you can edit the portal and activate it later.)

Instance Type

Select an object type to show only items for instances of that object

only.

For example, you might create a user-defined object called Change

Request and a user-defined subobject called Complaints. You then

create a Complaints portlet with the instance type of General. You can

put the portlet on any personalizable page and see all the Complaints

you have rights to see.

If instead you create it with an Instance Type of Change Request and

place the portlet on a Change Request dashboard page and open a

Change Request, you will only see the Complaints that are a part of

that Change Request. You will not see Complaints that belong to other

Change Requests.

Data Provider

Click the browse icon to select one from the list and then click Add.

5. Click Next.

The Graph Portlet: Graph Type page appears.

6. At Graph Type, choose a graph type, and click Next.

The Graph Portlet: Finish page appears.

7. If your query contains multiple metrics, at Metric select a metric to display

on the X-axis and click Next.

8. Click Finish and Open.

The Graph Portlet: General page appears.

9. Click Save.

10. Select Source Data from the content menu.

The Graph Portlet: Source Data page appears.

11. From the Available Metrics column, select the data you want to include in

the graph, then use the left and right arrow buttons to move the item into

the graph columns.

12. Click Save and Exit.

Page 166: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

166 Studio Developer's Guide

What’s Next?

Now that you have a new graph portlet, you should also perform the following

procedures:

■ Determining Graph Portlet Appearance

■ Determining Graph Portlet Data to Display

■ Changing Graph Portlets

Determine Graph Portlet Appearance

Now that you have created a graph, you can select from various display

options that determine how information displays on the graph (such as

legends, titles, and markers).

You can also choose to display guide lines that represent a fixed value or lines

that are relative to some other value. You can use this feature for example to

create guide lines or to display a mean value (see example next page).

In the following procedure you will be asked to specify various display options

(and only those that pertain to the graph type you have chosen will appear).

To determine graph appearance

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the graph portlet you want to determine graph

appearance.

The Graph Portlet: General page appears.

3. Select Options from the content menu.

The Graph Portlet: Options page appears.

4. Indicate the type of options you are setting. Choose:

■ Entire Graph, to set options for the entire graph.

■ X Axis, to set options only for the x-axis.

■ Y Axis, to set options only for the y-axis.

■ Secondary X Axis, to set options only for a secondary x-axis.

■ Guide, to specify guide lines (skip to To specify guide lines:).

5. Depending on the type of graph you selected, enter values for the

following display options, then click Save.

Angle of First Slice

Sets the position of the first dividing line. Use with Pie and Funnel.

Page 167: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 167

Axis Label

Displays the metric name along the X, Y, or both axis. Use with:

■ Bar. X, Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X axis

Crosses Opposite Axis At

Sets the intersection point of the axis. Use with:

■ Bar. Y axis

■ Column. X axis

■ Line. X axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X axis

Datapoint Labels

Displays the data name next to the value on the graph. Use with all

graph types:

Decimal Places

Sets the number of decimal places to display for numbers. Use with:

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column. Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Display Units

Rounds values up to nearest tens, hundreds, millions, and so on. Use

with

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column. Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Page 168: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

168 Studio Developer's Guide

Major Tick Marks

Determines if major tick marks appear on the axis.

Major tick marks are used to identify major intervals on a chart. For

example, the numbers 5, 10, 15, etc. may be highlighted with major

tick marks. Minor tick marks might be used to indicate individual

numbers (such as 2, 3, 4).

Use with:

■ Bar. Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Major Unit Increment

Sets the interval of major ticks on the axis. Use with:

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column. Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Maximum Value

Sets the greatest value to display on the axis. Use with:

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column. Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Minimum Value

Sets the smallest value to display on the axis. Use with:

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Page 169: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 169

Minor Tick Marks

Determines if minor tick marks appear on the axis.

Minor tick marks are used to identify minor intervals on a chart. For

example, the numbers 5, 10, 15, etc. may be highlighted with major

tick marks. Minor tick marks might be used to indicate individual

numbers (such as 2, 3, 4).

Use with:

■ Bar. Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Minor Unit Increment

Sets the interval of minor ticks on the axis. Use with:

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column. Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Mouseover Labels

Displays data values when the user moves the cursor over a graph

value. Use with all graph types:

Other Category Threshold

Groups all records for a specified value into a category called "Other".

Use this option if too many items appear on the graph. Use with:

■ Bar

■ Column

■ Line

■ Pie and Funnel

Show Axis

Determines if the axis line displays. Use with:

■ Bar. X, Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Page 170: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

170 Studio Developer's Guide

Show Legend

Displays a legend for the graph. Available for all graphs.

Show Line Markers

Shows data points on the graph (otherwise only a line displays).

Available for Line graphs.

Show Lines

Displays lines that connect the data points. Available for Line graphs.

Show Major Grid Lines

Determines if major grid lines display. Use with:

■ Bar. X, Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Show Minor Grid Lines

Determines if minor grid lines display. Use with:

■ Bar. X, Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Show Separator

Displays a comma to separate values over 999 (for example, 1,000).

Use with:

■ Bar. X axis

■ Column. Y axis

■ Line. Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Show Tick Labels

Determines if tick labels display. Use with:

■ Bar. X, Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

Page 171: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 171

Show Title

Displays the portlet name. Available for all graph types.

Sort Column

Sets a column to be the default sort item. Available for Column graphs.

Sub-type

Displays metrics as separate bars (instead of just a single merged

bar). Available for Bar and Column graphs.

Tick Label Angle

Sets the angle of the tick label. Use with:

■ Bar. X, Y axis

■ Column. X, Y axis

■ Line. X, Y axis

■ Bubble and Scatter. X, Y axis

6. To specify guide lines:

a. Click New.

b. At Axis, select the axis on which you want to draw the line.

c. At Label, enter a name for the line.

d. Click Show Label to display the name you entered above.

e. At Type, select Fixed Value to display a static value or Percent Value

to display a line that represents a percentage of another number.

f. At Color, select the color you want to use for the line.

g. Click Submit.

h. Repeat this procedure to add additional lines.

7. Click Exit.

Determine Graph Portlet Data to Display

When there is a lot of data available, graphs can be very complex. Filters help

users view only information that is important to them.

As you create a graph, you can select only the data items you want from all

available data provided by your query. You can also specify if filter options

appear on the portlet or on a separate page. Displaying filters on a separate

page is ideal when the filter will not change often. The filter options are still

available but are hidden. To access the filters, a CA Clarity PPM user can

simply click the Properties icon.

Page 172: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

172 Studio Developer's Guide

To determine which data to display

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the graph portlet you want to change.

3. Click Layout.

4. To add a field, select it from the Available column, then click the right

arrow (Add Field) button to move it to the Left or Right Column list.

5. To move fields between columns or to change their order within a list,

select a field and then use the arrows to move it.

6. At Default Filter State, select Expanded to automatically display the filter

page, or Collapsed to display only the filter field.

7. Select Allow Power Filter to provide advanced search features.

Note: By default, users can perform wildcard searches. With Power Filters,

you can provide multiple fields that users can enter or select attributes to

aid in searching.

8. Click Save.

9. To determine which data displays on the graph, under Graph Filter Section,

click Fields. Then:

a. At Display, select the fields you want to display. Choose All, Selected

(to display those you selected in the To add a field, select it from the

Available column, then click the right arrow (, or Available (to display

all data provided by the query).

b. To change information about a field, click the Properties icon next to

the field, enter the new information, then click Save.

10. Click Save and Exit.

Page 173: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Graph Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 173

Change Graph Portlets

Use this procedure to change an existing graph portlet. If you change a portlet

that a user is currently viewing, the user will be unaffected. The next time the

user displays the page, however, they will see your changes.

To change a graph portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the graph portlet you want to change.

3. To change the graph type:

a. Click Graph Type from the content menu.

The Graph Portlet: Graph Type page appears.

b. Select a new graph type from the Graph Type drop-down.

c. Click Save.

4. To change the data metric used for the graph portlet:

a. Click Source Data from the content menu.

The Graph Portlet: Source Data page appears.

b. At Metric, select a different metric from the drop-down.

c. Click Save.

5. Click Cancel to return to the Portlets page.

Delete Graph Portlets

Use this procedure to delete a graph portlet. When you delete a graph that a

user is currently viewing, the user is unaffected. The next time the user

displays the page, however the graph portlet will not appear.

To delete a graph portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Check the box next to the graph you want to delete.

3. Click Delete, then Yes to confirm.

Page 174: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

174 Studio Developer's Guide

Grid Portlets

Use grid portlets to display query data in rows and columns. Before you create

a grid, see the

detailed description of the various types of grids and display options you can

select for grids.

Grid portlets are most suitable when your query data contains only one or two

dimensions, which are related data elements in a query. For example,

project-related data (Project ID, name, start date, etc.) is considered a single

dimension. Queries that contain project and resource data are considered to be

two-dimensional. Graphs are better suited for query data that contains several

dimensions or metrics (query values that can be measured).

You might use grids to display:

■ Lists of resources or transactions

■ Capacity and assignment demand for resources over time

■ The number of overdue action items per resource per OBS unit

Access Rights and Grid Portlets

If the data you use on a grid portlet comes from a secured subpage, the

access restrictions of the subpage are also enforced in the grid portlet. That

means that if a user does not have the rights to access the content of the

subpage, the data from the subpage will not appear on the grid and the cells

for that data will be empty. If the data on the subpage is secure, however, and

you used it on an unsecured grid, the contents appear in the grid.

Grid Portlet Aggregation, Comparison, and Variance Options

You can create virtual columns with data that is derived from the query data.

Virtual columns can be:

■ Aggregations, which operate on a large set (column) of data and typically

return a single value (such as SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, and COUNT). You can

have multiple rows of aggregated data.

■ Comparisons, which compare two or more query data fields.

■ Variances, which display the difference between the aggregation and

comparison columns or rows.

Page 175: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 175

Depending upon the type of data involved, you can choose from the following

aggregation or comparison functions:

■ Sum

■ Average

■ Count

■ Minimum

■ Maximum

■ Variance

■ Standard deviation

Note: When the query data is a date, only the COUNT, MIN, and MAX

functions are available. String fields cannot be aggregated.

If the data in your query has at least two dimensions, you can create another

virtual column that compares and aggregates the two fields. Depending upon

the data, you can then choose to display the results as a number or a bar or

column graph.

Hierarchical Grid Portlets

A hierarchical grid portlet can be used to show the structure of data that has

more than one level. A parent row can have multiple child rows, and the data

that shows in the parent row can be an aggregate of the child data.

Things to Consider When Creating Grid Portlets

When creating grids, consider the following:

■ If your grid contains virtual columns, the source data for those columns

must be defined in the query that supplies data to the grid. In the

following example the values used to create a total row of data (budget,

actual, and allocated) must be provided by the query.

■ The y-axis (rows) of the grid can contain only one dimension of data.

■ If your query data contains two dimensions, either dimension be displayed

in the rows. The second dimension is displayed on the x-axis (columns).

Queries that contain three or more dimensions display one dimension in

the rows and all other dimensions in the columns.

■ Metrics always display in columns.

■ Metrics display in the first or last header row of columns when the query

data contains two or more dimensions. If the query contains three or more

dimensions, the dimensions are placed in order along the x-axis (see

example next page).

Page 176: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

176 Studio Developer's Guide

Create Grid Portlets

Use this procedure to create a grid portlet. Before you perform this procedure:

■ Make sure that you have created a query that will provide data for the

portlet.

■ Review the tips for creating grids.

To create a grid portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click New.

3. Select Grid and click Submit.

4. Complete the following fields:

Portlet Name

Enter the name of the portlet.

Portlet ID

Enter a unique ID for the portlet.

Content Source

Select a data source.

Category

Select a category for the portlet.

Description

Enter a description.

Active

Check this to allow users to see the portlet. (If you leave this

unchecked you can activate it later.)

Instance Type

Select an object type to show only items for instances of that object.

For example, suppose you create an object called Change Request and

a subobject called Complaints. You then create a Complaints portlet

with the instance type of General. You can put the portlet on any

personalizable page and see all the Complaints you have rights to see.

If instead you create a new portlet with an instance type of Change

Request, place the portlet on a Change Request dashboard page, and

then open a Change Request, you will only see the Complaints that are

a part of that Change Request. You will not see Complaints that belong

to other Change Requests.

Page 177: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 177

Data Provider

Click the browse icon and select one from the list and then click Add.

5. Next to Query, click the Browse icon, select the query to use, and then

click Add.

6. Click Next.

7. On the Grid Portlet: Finish page, click Finish and Open.

What’s Next?

After you have created a new grid portlet, you should also perform the

following procedures:

■ Determining the Layout of Grid Portlets

■ Restricting Access to Portlets and Pages

■ Using Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

Page 178: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

178 Studio Developer's Guide

Determine the Layout of Grid Portlets

Use the following procedure to determine the column sort order of data that

appears in your grid portlet. You can specify how columns will be sorted, filter

options, and define any virtual columns or rows that are derived from your

query data appear on the grid.

To determine the layout of grid portlets

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the grid portlet you want to change.

The Grid Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Layout under the List Column Section content menu item.

The Grid Portlet: List Column Layout page appears.

4. Do the following, and click Save:

■ From the Available Columns list, select a column to include in the grid,

then click the right arrow (Add Field) button to add it to the Selected

Columns list. Use the up and down arrows to place the columns in the

desired order. Repeat this step for each item you add to the grid.

■ To determine how columns are sorted on the grid:

a. Select the order in which columns should be sorted.

b. Click Ascending or Descending to determine how data is sorted

within each column.

Your changes are saved.

5. To determine which fields appear on the grid click Fields from the List

Column Section content menu item.

The Grid Portlet: List Column Fields page appears.

6. From the Show drop down, select the attributes to display on this page.

7. From the Display drop down, select the values you want to add to the grid.

Page 179: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 179

8. To determine grid display options click Options, then:

a. Select Mouseover and redline text, to display a secondary value when

users place the mouse over a cell in a grid.

This helps you compare values. For example, if you have a column

called "Cost" and another column called "Baseline Cost", you may want

to display both values in one cell. To show both, you would choose

Baseline Cost as the secondary value. The Cost value displays as

usual; however when the user moves the mouse over a cell in the grid,

it also shows the Baseline Cost.

Select Use Redline Text to display the secondary value in the same cell

using red strike-through text. Using the example above, the Baseline

Cost appears crossed out and in red text; Cost also displays in the cell

in black text.

b. At Rows per Page, select the number of rows to display.

c. Select Do Not Show Results Until I Filter if you want filter results to

display only after the user clicks Filter.

d. Select Highlight Row by Attribute to highlight an attribute in your grid

when the value is ―true‖ or ―false‖.

For example, if you want to see all investments in your portfolio that

are approved, enable highlighting for the Approved attribute. Then,

when an investment is approved, it is highlighted on the grid.

e. Click Save.

9. In the List Filter section, click Layout and set the following options:

a. At Available, select the query fields you want to make available to CA

Clarity PPM users who use this portlet. Click Add Field to move them to

the Selected Columns lists.

b. At Section Title, enter the text you want to appear at the top of this

section.

c. At Default Filter State, select Expanded or Collapsed.

d. Click Allow Power Filter to provide advanced search features.

e. Click Save.

10. In the List Filter Section, click Aggregation and set the following options

then click Save:

■ To show one or more aggregation row that group several data items,

click Show Aggregation Row. Then, in the Aggregation Rules section,

select the field to aggregate and an aggregation function to use for

displaying data in the row.

Page 180: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Grid Portlets

180 Studio Developer's Guide

■ To show a comparison row that compares values, click Show

Comparison Row. Then in the Comparison Rules section, select the

comparison column and comparison aggregation function. Click the link

in the Display column to specify how the comparison data will display.

■ To show the difference between the aggregation and comparison rows,

click Show Variance Row.

11. To determine the properties to display in the filter field, under List Filter

Section, click Fields. Then:

a. At Display, select the fields you want to display:

■ Choose All,

■ Selected (to display those you selected), or

■ Available (to display all possible fields).

b. To change information about a field, click the Properties icon next to

the field, enter the new information, then click Save.

c. Click Save and Exit.

Change Grid Portlets

Use this procedure to change a grid portlet.

To delete a grid portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. To filter the portlet list, in the Portlet Filter section enter one or more

attributes about the grid you want to change and click Filter.

3. Click the name of the grid portlet you want to change.

4. Change any of the following items:

■ Portlet name

■ Category (optional)

■ Description

■ Active status (optional)

■ OBS Selections

5. (Optional) Change the appearance of the grid portlet

Note: Click Save on each page to save your changes.

6. (Optional) Change the access restrictions for the gird portlet.

7. Deploy the grid.

Page 181: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

HTML Text Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 181

Delete Grid Portlets

Use this procedure to delete a grid portlet. When you delete a grid that a user

is currently viewing, the user is unaffected. The next time the user displays the

page, however the grid portlet will not appear.

To delete a grid portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Check the box next to the grid you want to delete.

3. Click Delete, then Yes to confirm.

HTML Text Portlets

You can use HTML portlets to display HTML data. Before you create a portlet

page, see the topics in this section for a detailed description of the various

types of portlet pages and display options you can select when creating portlet

pages.

As you create portlet pages, first determine if the page will contain tabs. Then

determine if you will allow users to change the pages or to add their own tabs

and content. Once a page is personalized by a user, it will not be affected by

any future administrative changes, except the addition of any required

portlets.

You can use Studio to do the following:

■ Create pages with various page layouts

■ Define personalized home pages

■ Add new tabs to the CA Clarity PPM Organizer and Overview pages

■ Create a business intelligence page

■ Display news from a company Intranet site

■ Display corporate phone information

■ Display portions of external web sites

■ Display recorded messages

Page 182: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

HTML Text Portlets

182 Studio Developer's Guide

Create HTML Portlets

Use the following procedure to create a new HTML portlet.

To create a new HTML portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click New.

3. Click HTML, then click Submit.

4. Complete the following fields:

Portlet Name

Enter the name of the portlet as it is to appear in CA Clarity PPM (for

example, ―My Overview‖ or ―Company Content‖).

Portlet ID

Enter a unique identifier for the portlet.

Content Source

Select a data source.

Category

Select a category.

Description

Describe the portlet.

Active

Check this to allow users to see the portlet. (If you leave this

unchecked you can activate it later.)

Instance Type

Select an object type to show only items for instances of that object

only. For example, suppose you create an object called Change

Request and a subobject called Complaints. You then create a

Complaints portlet with the instance type of General. You can put

General portlets on any personalizable page and see all the Complaints

you have rights to see.

If instead you create it with an instance type of Change Request, place

the portlet on a Change Request dashboard page, and open a Change

Request, you will only see the Complaints that are a part of that

Change Request. You will not see Complaints that belong to other

Change Requests.

Page 183: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

HTML Text Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 183

HTML Code

Enter the HTML you want to display in the portlet.

5. Click Save and Continue.

Change HTML Portlets

Use the following procedure to change an HTML portlet.

To change an HTML portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the HTML portlet you want to change.

3. Change any of the following items:

Portlet Name

Enter the name of the page as it is to appear in CA Clarity PPM (for

example, ―My Overview‖ or ―Company Content‖).

Category

Select a category.

Description

Describe the page.

Active

To allow users to see the portlet, check this option. (If you leave this

unchecked you can activate it later).

HTML Code

Enter new HTML to display in the portlet.

4. Click Save and Exit.

Page 184: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

HTML Text Portlets

184 Studio Developer's Guide

Delete HTML Portlets

Use the following procedure to delete an HTML portlet.

Note: When you delete a portlet that a user is currently viewing, the user is

unaffected. The next time the user tries to display the page, it will not appear.

To delete an HTML portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Check the box next to the HTML portlet you want to delete.

3. Click Delete, then Yes to confirm.

Page 185: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 185

Filter Portlets

Filter portlets coordinate filtering operations across portlets in CA Clarity PPM.

A filter portlet contains defined placeholder filter fields that are mapped to

attributes in grid and graph portlets. When you configure and publish a filter

portlet on a page with grid or graph portlets, CA Clarity PPM users can filter

the page content across portlets using the portlet's fields.

When a user clicks the filter portlet's Filter button, the following occurs:

■ All portlets configured to work with the filter portlet are filtered using the

filter portlet values.

■ Filter portlet values appear in the filters of portlets on the page. The portlet

attribute must be mapped to the filter portlet field for the value to display.

A filter portlet can contain fields that do not display in all portlets. In this

case, the affected portlets still filter on the filter portlet‘s values, even if

the values are not displayed.

Page 186: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

186 Studio Developer's Guide

You can configure a filter portlet to appear on a page in the following ways:

■ Standalone filter section for a tabbed or non-tabbed page

■ Toolbar section in a tabbed or non-tabbed page

Filter Precedence

The following table shows how filter precedence works when multiple filters are

mapped to a filter portlet.

Filter from this

portlet

Result

Filter portlet The filter portlet has precedence and determines the

filter values for all portlet attributes mapped to filter

portlet fields. The user sees the following behavior:

■ Show All selected at the filter portlet level

initiates a Show All behavior for all portlets

mapped to the filter portlet. Any portlet attribute

that is not mapped does not have its value

overridden.

■ Data that displays in an individual portlet is

reset, and the result set that appears is

determined by the filter criteria of the filter

portlet combined with the portlet‘s filter criteria

of unmapped portlet attributes.

■ Portlets that have no mapped attributes are not

affected by the filter portlet.

Grid or graph portlet The portlet filter has precedence. The user sees the

following behavior:

■ If a user clicks Show All on the portlet filter, all

the filter records for the portlet appear. Portlet

filter values always override the filter values of

previously submitted filter portlet requests.

Page 187: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 187

Scope of Filter Portlets

You can configure a filter portlet to share filter values for the following levels in

the CA Clarity PPM application:

Page level

Filter values are not shared across pages.

Application level

Filter values are shared across pages. For a filter portlet to be application

level, the same filter portlet must be added to each page.

Important! Scope for filter portlets is based on the use of the same filter

portlet across pages. Different filter portlets cannot be configured to share and

persist filter request values. The scope across pages is determined by the

selection of the Persist option for the filter portlet to persist its filter request

values and the mapping of the filter portlet fields to the attributes of portlets

on the pages.

Filter Persistence

The following rules determine which filter‘s values persist as filter criteria:

■ If the scope of a filter portlet is page level, the filter portlet field values

persist only within that page.

■ If the scope is application level, the filter portlet used last has its field

values persisted across pages.

■ If multiple filter portlets are present on a page, the fields of the most

recently used filter portlet are persisted. This is true for both page-level

and application-level cases.

Page 188: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

188 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Set Up Filter Portlets

Before you create a filter portlet to use on a page, identify the following:

■ All portlets that are to appear on the page

■ Attributes on each of the portlets that you want to map to the filter portlet

fields

For a filter portlet to work, its fields must be mapped to the appropriate

attributes in the portlets that provide content on the page.

The following steps show how to configure a filter portlet for a page:

1. Create the filter portlet (see page 188).

2. Add fields to the filter portlet (see page 189).

3. Determine the field layout on the filter portlet (see page 201).

4. Select an existing portlet page or create a portlet page and add content

(see page 203).

5. Add the filter portlet to the portlet page (see page 206) and map the filter

portlet fields to the attributes of the portlets on the page.

Create Filter Portlets

Use this procedure to create a filter portlet that can be used to filter the

content of all portlets that appear on a page.

To create a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click New.

3. Select Filter and click Submit.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

4. In the General section of the page, enter the following information:

Portlet Name

Enter the name of the portlet.

Portlet ID

Enter a unique ID for the portlet.

Content Source

Select a data source.

Page 189: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 189

Category

Select a category for the portlet.

Description

Enter a description.

Active

This check box is disabled in create mode because all new filter

portlets are active by default. You can deactivate a filter portlet only in

edit mode.

Instance Type

This field determines what type of page the filter portlet can be placed

on. If you select General for this field, the filter portlet can be placed

on any page.

5. Click Submit.

Field Data Types for Adding to Filter Portlets

You can add fields of the following data types to a filter portlet:

■ String

■ Number

■ Money

■ Boolean

■ Date

■ Lookup

■ Multivalued Lookup

■ URL

Add String Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedure to add a string field to a filter portlet.

To add a string field to a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

Page 190: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

190 Studio Developer's Guide

3. Click Fields from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Fields page appears.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet: Field Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "String".

Display Type

Select "Text Entry" or "Exact Text".

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. If the filter portlet associated with this field is published to a

page as the filter default, this value will be applied to the portlet

attributes mapped to this field.

Width

This is a numeric value that indicates the width of the field. If you

leave the field blank, the field receives the default, which is 30 pixels.

The default for date fields is 20 pixels.

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed. If you select this check box, you must

enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request. If you select this field, you must provide a value in the Default

Filter field.

Page 191: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 191

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user. If you select this check box, you

must enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

6. Click Submit.

Add Number Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedure to add a number field to a filter portlet.

To add a number field to a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Fields from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Fields page appears.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet: Field Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "Number".

Display Type

Select "Text Entry" if a number is to be typed into the field or "Numeric

Range" for a range of numbers.

Page 192: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

192 Studio Developer's Guide

Show as Percent

Check the box to show the value entered in the field as a percent.

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. If you selected a display type of "Numeric Range" you must

enter the beginning and ending numbers of the range for the default.

If the filter portlet associated with this field is published to a page as

the filter default, this value will be applied to the portlet attributes

mapped to this field.

Width

This is a numeric value that indicates the width of the field. If you

leave the field blank, the field receives the default, which is 30 pixels.

The default for date fields is 20 pixels.

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed. If you select this check box, you must

enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request. If you select this field, you must provide a value in the Default

Filter field.

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user. If you select this check box, you

must enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

6. Click Submit.

Page 193: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 193

Add Money Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedure to add a money field to a filter portlet.

To add a money field to a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Fields from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Fields page appears.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet: Field Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "Money".

Display Type

Select "Text Entry" if a value is to be typed into the field or "Numeric

Range" for a range of values.

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. If you selected a display type of "Numeric Range" you must

enter the beginning and ending numbers of the range for the default.

If the filter portlet associated with this field is published to a page as

the filter default, this value will be applied to the portlet attributes

mapped to this field.

Width

This is a numeric value that indicates the width of the field. If you

leave the field blank, the field receives the default, which is 30 pixels.

The default for date fields is 20 pixels.

Page 194: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

194 Studio Developer's Guide

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed. If you select this check box, you must

enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request. If you select this field, you must provide a value in the Default

Filter field.

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user. If you select this check box, you

must enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

6. Click Submit.

Add Boolean Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedure to add a Boolean field to a filter portlet.

To add a Boolean field to filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Fields from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Fields page appears.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet: Field Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Page 195: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 195

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "Boolean."

Display Type

This field defaults to the read-only value Pull-Down.

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. If the filter portlet associated with this field is published to a

page as the filter default, this value will be applied to the portlet

attributes mapped to this field.

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed. If you select this check box, you must

enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request. If you select this field, you must provide a value in the Default

Filter field.

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user. If you select this check box, you

must enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

6. Click Submit.

Page 196: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

196 Studio Developer's Guide

Add Date Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedure to add a date field to a filter portlet.

To add a date field to a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Fields from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Fields page appears.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet: Field Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "Date".

Display Type

Select "Date" or "Date Range".

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. Select the Rolling Date option and select the date you want to

provide a dynamic date that is always current, or select the Specific

Date option and supply a specific date. If the filter portlet associated

with this field is published to a page as the filter default, this value will

be applied to the portlet attributes mapped to this field.

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed. If you select this check box, you must

enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Page 197: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 197

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request. If you select this field, you must provide a value in the Default

Filter field.

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user. If you select this check box, you

must enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

6. Click Submit.

Add Lookup or Multi-valued Lookup Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedures to add a lookup or multi-valued lookup field to a

filter portlet. Lookup fields display a drop-down or browse list from which users

can select items.

To add a lookup or multi-valued lookup field to a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Fields from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Fields page appears.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet: Field Properties page appears.

5. Complete the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Page 198: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

198 Studio Developer's Guide

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "Lookup" or "Multivalued Lookup".

Display Type

Select "Pull-Down" or "Browse".

Lookup

Click the Browse icon to select a lookup list of values to appear in the

field. The user views the list you select according to the display type

selected.

6. Click Save.

The fields on the page change to reflect the lookup you select and its data

source (static or dynamic). Some of the fields listed in this section may not

show on your page.

Lookup Style

Select "Single-select" or "Multiple-select" to indicate how many items a

user can select for the field.

Entry

This field appears for static dependent list lookups only. It determines

the starting point for the data the user sees listed in the lookup field in

CA Clarity PPM. Select a level in the Level field or click the Browse icon

and select a parent lookup value.

Exit

This field appears for static dependent list lookups only. It determines

the end point of the data the user sees listed in the lookup field in CA

Clarity PPM.

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. Click the Browse icon to select a default from the values

available from the lookup selected in the Lookup field. If the filter

portlet associated with this field is published to a page as the filter

default, this value will be applied to the portlet attributes mapped to

this field.

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed.

Page 199: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 199

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request.

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

7. If you selected a parameterized lookup in the Lookup field, complete the

mappings in the Lookup Parameter Mappings section. This section is visible

only for parameterized lookups.

Note: See the Administration Guide for more information on

parameterized lookups.

8. Click Submit.

Page 200: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

200 Studio Developer's Guide

Add URL Fields to Filter Portlets

Use the following procedure to add a URL field to a filter portlet. Use URL fields

as a place to put a Uniform Resource Locator, such as a reference to a

professional Internet homepage, an FTP archive where you maintain papers, or

to a club or group's homepage of which you are a member.

To add a URL field

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

3. Click Fields.

4. Click Add.

The Filter Portlet:Field Properties page appears.

5. Enter information in the following fields:

Field Name

Enter the name you want to appear in the filter portlet.

Field ID

Enter a unique identifier for the field.

Description

Enter a description of the field.

Data Type

Select "URL".

Display Type

The read-only default selection for this field is "Text Entry."

Filter Default

Enter the value you want to appear in the filter field as the default

value. If the filter portlet associated with this field is published to a

page as the filter default, this value will be applied to the portlet

attributes mapped to this field.

Width

This is a numeric value that indicates the width of the field. If you

leave the field blank, the field receives the default, which is 30 pixels.

The default for date fields is 20 pixels.

Required in Filter

When you select this check box, a value is required in the field when

the filter request is executed. If you select this check box, you must

enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Page 201: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 201

Hidden in Filter

When you select this check box, the field does not display in the filter

at runtime, but the default value of the field is included in every filter

request. If you select this field, you must provide a value in the Default

Filter field.

Read-Only in Filter

When you select this check box, the field appears with a default value

which cannot be edited by the user. If you select this check box, you

must enter a value in the Filter Default field.

Hint

Enter a short message that helps the user use the field.

Tooltip

Enter a short message to display when the user moves a cursor over

the field.

6. Click Submit.

View the List of Portlet Pages for Filter Portlets

Use this procedure to view the list of portlet pages that contain a specific filter

portlet.

To view the portlet pages for a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet whose pages you want to view.

The Filter Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Portlet Pages from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Portlet Pages page appears listing the pages that include

the filter portlet.

Determine the Layout of Fields on Filter Portlets

Use this procedure after you have created the filter portlet and its fields to

determine the placement of the fields within the filter portlet when it is

rendered on a portlet page.

Page 202: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

202 Studio Developer's Guide

The displayed list order of fields is how the fields appear in the Section view on

a portlet page. If the Toolbar view is selected for the filter portlet, the fields

display in a different order. The left column is equivalent to the top row and

the right column is equivalent to the bottom row on the portlet. The left and

right columns represent where the fields display on the portlet page.

To determine the layout fields on a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the filter portlet you want to change.

The Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Layout from the content menu.

The Filter Portlet: Layout page appears.

4. Move the fields to the appropriate list box by highlighting the fields and

clicking the appropriate Move Field buttons.

The field is moved.

5. Change the order of the fields in the list boxes by highlighting a field and

clicking the up and down arrows to move it in the list.

The field is moved within the list.

6. Complete the following fields:

Render As

Select how you want the filter portlet to appear on the published page.

Values: Toolbar or Section

Note: If you select toolbar, then the default filter state is fixed as

expanded.

Default Filter State

Select how you want the filter portlet to appear on the published page.

Values: Collapsed or Expanded

7. Click Save.

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

You can distribute new pages to all or selected CA Clarity PPM users by

creating global pages in the Administration Tool. The pages you create in the

Administration Tool can be used to distribute content via menu manager on

the left side of the page.

Page 203: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 203

Portlet pages are HTML pages that contain graph, grid, or HTML portlets. Once

you have created a graph, grid, or HTML portlet, use the information in this

section to create or reuse HTML pages, and manage tabs on those pages so

that users can use your portlets.

Use CA Clarity PPM Studio to do the following:

■ Create pages with various page layouts

■ Define the Home page on a per-instance basis

■ Add new tabs to the Organizer and Overview pages

■ Create a Business Intelligence page

First determine if the new page will contain tabs and if users can change the

new page or add their own tabs. Tabbed pages can provide a useful method to

group several related pages under a menu item. You can control whether these

pages can be personalized. CA Clarity PPM users can add portlets and create

additional tabs. Once a user personalizes a page, those changes will not be

effected by changes made in CA Clarity PPM Studio (except the addition of

required portlets).

Note: To make sure that all users see the same page and any future changes,

disable the Personalizable option.

Create Portlet Pages

To create new portlet pages

1. Click Portlet Pages from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Pages page appears.

2. Click New.

The Create Page page appears.

3. Complete the following fields:

Page Name

Enter the name of the page.

Page ID

Enter a unique identifier for the page.

Content Source

Select a data source.

Type

Select a page template (to create a page with tabs, select a template

that contains tabs).

Page 204: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

204 Studio Developer's Guide

Description

Describe the page.

Template

Choose one of the following templates:

■ Application Page Template. The template for CA Clarity PPM user

pages.

■ Admin Page Template. The template for Administration Tool pages.

■ Popup Page Template. The template for popups.

4. To allow users to personalize the page, check Personalizable.

5. At Layout, select the option that has the number of columns and column

sizes that you want as the default for the portlet page.

6. Click Save and Continue.

The Page: Properties page appears.

7. (Optional) To allow users to create links to the page, select the Linkable

check box.

8. Click Save and Continue.

If the Linkable check box was selected, the Page: Link Parameters page

appears.

9. If you selected the Linkable check box, do the following:

a. Click New to create a link.

b. Complete the following fields:

■ Parameter Name. Enter a name for the link. This is the name you

and others will select when creating links to this page from an

object or portlet.

■ Parameter ID. Enter a unique ID for the link.

c. Click Submit.

d. Click Continue.

The Page:Content page appears.

10. To add content to the page, do the following:

a. Click Add.

b. Select the boxes next to the portlet content you want to add to the

page and click Add.

11. Click Save and Continue.

The Page: Filter page appears.

Page 205: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 205

12. To add a filter to the page, do the following:

a. Click Add.

b. Select the boxes next to the content filter you want to add to the page

and click Add.

13. Click Save and Continue.

The Page: Layout page appears.

a. Select the column configuration you want from the drop-down list in

the Layout field:

■ Three Column 25-50-25. In this display, the Left column uses

25% of the available page space, the Center column uses 50% of

the available space, and the Right column, 25%.

■ Three Column 33-33-33. The three columns share the available

page space equally.

■ Two Column 50-50. The Left and Right columns share space

equally; the Center column is eliminated.

■ Two Column 66-34. The Left column uses 66% of the available

page space, while the Right column uses 34%.

■ Row Layout. In this display, portlets on each row on a portlet

page can be allotted either 33% of the width of the page (three

portlets in the row), 50% (two portlets), or 100% (a single

portlet). This is unlike other Layout options which apply the column

selection to the entire page.

b. Select the content from the left column, then click Move Content to

move the content to the center or right columns.

c. Position the content in the correct order in the columns by using the up

and down arrows beside each column.

Note: If Row Layout is selected, each row on the page can have

different column widths. As portlets are moved between the columns,

percentages of 33%, 50% or 100% are allotted to the portlets,

depending on the number of items included in a single row in the

layout columns.

Page 206: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

206 Studio Developer's Guide

The following figure shows rows on a portlet page with a Layout option

of Row Layout. The first row defined for the portlet page contains three

portlets and each portlet is allotted 33 percent of the width of the

page. The second row of the portlet page contains two portlets and

each is allotted 50 percent of the width of the page. The remaining

rows contain a single portlet and 100 percent of the page width is

allocated in these instances.

d. Click Save and Continue.

14. Control access to this portlet.

15. Add this page to a menu.

Add Filter Portlets to Portlet Pages

Use this procedure to add a filter portlet to a page that already has portlets for

content added. The procedure explains how to add the filter portlet to a page

and map the filter portlet fields to the attributes of other portlets that appear

on the page.

To add a filter portlet to a page

1. Click Portlet Pages from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Pages page appears.

Page 207: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 207

2. Click the name of the page you want to change.

If you are adding the filter portlet to a page, click Tabs in the content

menu and click the name of the tab in the list to display the Tab:

Properties page.

3. Click Page Filters in the content menu.

4. Click Add.

5. Check the box next to the filter portlet you want to add to the page and

click Add.

You can add multiple filter portlets to a page.

The Page: Filter page appears showing the filter portlet name in the list.

6. Make the following adjustments.

■ (Optional) If you are adding the filter portlet to pages and you want

the values in the filter to persist when you move from one page to

another, select the Persist check box. Filter values will persist only

across pages that use the same filter portlet.

■ (Optional) Select the Default option for the desired page filter default.

The first filter published to the page is the page filter default unless a

selection indicates otherwise.

7. Click the icon next to the filter portlet name.

The Page: Filter Content Mappings page appears. This page shows the

filter portlet fields listed under each portlet on the page and allows you to

map corresponding portlet fields.

Page 208: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Portlet Pages: Deploying Content

208 Studio Developer's Guide

8. In the Mapping Field drop-down, for each entry, select the portlet attribute

that you want to map to the filter portlet field. The values that appear in

the drop-down are filtered based on the data type of the filter portlet field

being mapped.

■ If you are mapping lookup attributes, the filter portlet field and the

portlet attribute must have the same lookup ID.

■ If a filter portlet field is not mapped to at least one portlet attribute on

the page, the field does not display in the filter portlet.

■ If a filter portlet does not have at least one field mapped, the filter

portlet does not display on the page.

9. Select the Hide If Empty check box to hide the portlet if a value is not

entered in the corresponding filter portlet field during a filter request.

If you check the box for multiple attributes in a portlet, a blank

corresponding filter portlet field for any of the attributes will cause the

portlet not to appear.

10. Click Submit.

Delete Portlet Pages

Use this procedure to delete portlet pages. When you delete portlet pages that

a user is currently viewing, the user is unaffected. The next time the user

displays the page, however the portlets page will not appear.

To delete a portlet page

1. Select Portlet Pages from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Pages page appears.

2. Check the box next to the portlet page you want to delete.

3. Click Delete, then click Yes.

Page 209: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Publish Changes to Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 209

Publish Changes to Portlets

You can update portlets for CA Clarity PPM users by publishing the portlet.

When you publish changes to a portlet, the new portlet overwrites the existing

portlet, including any changes that a user has created by personalizing the

portlet or any changes that a CA Clarity PPM administrator has created and

previously published. If you are using partitions, the new published portlet

affects only the partition you have selected.

During a CA Clarity PPM upgrade or when installing add-ins, personalized user

portlets are not upgraded. To keep users current, you may want to publish any

new portlets provided by a CA Clarity PPM upgrade or from an add-in. Use the

Portlet: General page to publish changes. To access this page, select Portlets

from the CA Clarity PPM Studio menu, and open the portlet that has changed.

To publish changes to portlets

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the portlet you want to publish.

The Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Publish.

Access to Portlets and Pages

You can restrict access to portlets and pages for individual users, groups, or

OBS units. When you restrict access to pages, users won‘t see links to the

pages if they do not have the appropriate access rights. For portlets, you can

assign restrictions that prevent users from adding portlets to their personal

pages. If a user has access to a page, they can view all the portlets on the

page.

Page 210: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

210 Studio Developer's Guide

Restrict Access to Portlets or Pages

To restrict access to portlets

1. From CA Clarity PPM Studio menu, select:

■ Portlets, to restrict access to a portlet, or

■ Portlet Pages, to restrict access to a portlet page.

2. Click the name of the desired portlet or portlet page.

3. At Access to this Page, click the type of user you want to grant access

rights to. Choose from:

■ Resource (a user)

■ Group (a group of users)

■ OBS Unit (an OBS unit)

4. Click Add.

5. Select the rights you want to enable. Choose from the following:

Portlet - View

Allows users to view a portlet in the application.

Group

Allows users to change and view the definition of a portlet (if the user

has been granted the ―Studio Access‖ right.

Page - View

Portlet Pages only. Allows users to view the page in the application.

Page Definition Editor

Portlet Pages only. Allows users to edit, view, and delete the page

definition (requires that the user have ―Studio Access‖ rights).

Page Definition Viewer

Portlet Pages only. Allows users to view the page definition (requires

that the user have ―Studio Access‖ rights).

6. Click Next and see a list of resources, group or OBS units appear.

Note: Click the + icon to expand an OBS unit to see child OBS units.

7. Check the box next to each user for whom you want to grant the access

rights you selected in Select the rights you want to enable. Choose from:.

8. (OBS units only) For each OBS unit, select one of the following OBS

association modes:

■ Unit and ancestors, grants rights to the OBS unit and all of its parent

OBS units.

Page 211: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 211

■ Unit and descendants, grants rights to the OBS unit and all of its child

OBS units.

■ Unit, descendants, and ancestors, grants rights to the OBS unit and all

of its parent and child OBS units.

■ Unit only, grants rights to the OBS unit only, not to any parent or

child.

9. Click Add.

User Configuration Restrictions of Portlets

When you create a portlet, users have the ability to configure the portlet by

default. You can restrict the ability to configure an individual portlet grid,

graph, or filter view using the following options:

Allow Configuration

When this option is turned off for a portlet, users cannot see the Configure

option in the portlet‘s Actions field drop-down list.

When turned on, this option allows users to:

■ Configure column layout

■ Configure column names and display properties

■ Configure display options

■ Add aggregation rows

Allow Label Configuration

This option works in conjunction with the Allow Configuration option. If the

Allow Configuration option is selected and the Allow Label Configuration

option is cleared, field labels become unavailable for configuration while

other items can still be configured. Specifically, this option determines

whether the following items can be edited:

■ List column fields

■ List column field labels

■ List filter fields

■ List filter field properties (filter label field only)

■ Graph options (metrics section for 1D bar, column, and line graphs)

■ Graph filter fields

■ Graph filter field properties (filter label field only)

Page 212: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

212 Studio Developer's Guide

Restrict User Configuration

To restrict user configuration rights

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the desired portlet to open it.

3. Click Options in the content menu on the left.

The Options page for the portlet appears.

4. Clear one or both of the following options:

■ Allow Configuration

■ Allow Label Configuration

5. Click Save.

Set a System View for a Portlet

You can set up and maintain a portlet that has the same view for all users by

setting the Allow Configuration option and publishing the portlet changes.

To set a system view for a portlet page

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Click the name of the desired portlet to open it.

3. Click Options in the content menu on the left.

The Options page for the portlet appears.

4. Clear the Allow Configuration option.

5. Click Save.

6. Click General in the content menu.

7. Click Publish.

Page 213: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 213

Configurable User Actions

A configurable user action is an ease-of-use feature that saves a user time and

effort by reducing the number of mouse clicks required to add or delete a new

instance of an object. You can add New or Delete configurable user actions to a

new grid portlet.

When you create an object, the New and Delete actions are created

automatically for the object and can be set up to operate with a grid portlet. In

CA Clarity PPM, buttons for the actions are available to the user on the portlet.

For example, if you create a new grid portlet using the user-defined object

Compliance with an NSQL query as the data provider, you can add the New

button to the portlet in Studio. When a user clicks the New button in the grid

portlet in CA Clarity PPM, the Create Compliance property page appears.

Note: Custom user actions are not available. Only New or Delete can be

selected for user actions.

Radio buttons or check boxes are automatically provided as selectors in the

first column of the grid portlet if they are required for multiple or single row

selections for the user action.

Access to the user action buttons is controlled by global access rights and

instance rights. The buttons are visible only to users who have global create or

edit rights.

If a user has global create or edit rights but does not have instance rights, the

buttons display but do not complete the requested action. The user receives an

error message indicating that the action cannot be completed without the

proper rights for the instance. For example, a grid portlet with configurable

user action buttons might show four instances of an object listed. If a user has

global create or edit access rights, the Delete button appears on the grid

portlet. The user can select any of the instances and click Delete, but only

those instances to which the user has instance access rights are deleted. Any

selected instances that the user does not have rights to are not deleted. In this

case, the user receives an error message.

Page 214: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

214 Studio Developer's Guide

How to Add Configurable User Actions

The following steps explain the process for adding configurable user actions to

a grid portlet. A user-defined object, an NSQL query, and a grid portlet must

be associated in a specific way so that the action buttons appear and can be

configured on the portlet. Each step below is required to set up user action

buttons.

To add configurable user actions to a grid portlet, you must:

1. Create an object (see page 41).

2. Create an NSQL query (see page 214) for the object.

3. Create a grid portlet (see page 176) that uses the NSQL query as a data

provider.

4. Select configurable user actions for the grid portlet (see page 216).

5. Test the configurable user actions in CA Clarity PPM (see page 216).

Create an NSQL Query for User Actions

To create the NSQL query, you need the following information:

■ An alias name for the object that can be included in the query and used as

an internal ID for the object‘s database table. The alias name can be any

value that you choose. For example, COMPL_ID could be the alias for an

object named Compliance.

■ The database table name and the column names for the attributes "ID"

and "Name," which are created when the object is created. To find the

column names, see the list of attributes for the object. The list contains the

database table and column for each attribute.

To create an NSQL query

1. Click Queries from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Queries page appears.

2. Click New.

The Query Properties: General page appears.

3. Complete the following information:

Query Name

Enter a name for the query.

Query ID

Enter a unique ID for the query.

Content Source

Select the content source for the query from the drop-down list.

Page 215: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 215

4. Click Save and Continue.

The Query Properties: NSQL page appears.

5. In the NSQL text box, enter the following text and supply the appropriate

values where indicated by brackets:

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:I.ID:<alias

name>@,

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:I.

<database table name for attribute "id">:ID@,

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:I.

<database table name for attribute "name">:NAME@

FROM <database table name> I

WHERE @FILTER@

6. Click Save and Continue.

The Query Properties: Attributes page appears. The listing of attributes for

the query contains the alias name, the ID attribute, and the Name

attribute.

7. Click Continue.

The Query Properties: Configurable Actions page appears.

8. In the Action Source section, click the Browse icon and select the name of

the data provider object for the query. The data provider must be a

user-defined object.

9. In the Primary Key (Id:Type) section, select the alias name.

Entering the alias name here allows identification of the instance in the

portlet view in CA Clarity PPM so that the appropriate configurable action

can be applied.

10. Click Save and Exit.

Page 216: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Access to Portlets and Pages

216 Studio Developer's Guide

Select Configurable User Actions for Grid Portlets

This procedure explains how to add configurable user actions to a grid portlet.

To select configurable user actions for grid portlets

1. Create a grid portlet and select the NSQL query created for the portlet in

the Data Provider field.

2. Select Portlets from the CA Clarity PPM Studio menu, then click the portlet

name.

The Grid Portlet: General page appears.

3. Click Layout from the content menu.

The Grid Portlet: List Column Layout page appears.

4. In the Column Layout section, do the following:

a. Move "id" and "name" to the Selected Columns list box.

b. Move any additional fields that you want to display in the portlet to the

Selected Columns list box.

c. If the alias name appears in the Selected Column list box, move it to

the Available Columns list box.

5. In the Action Layout section, select the actions you want available in the

portlet and move them to the Selection Actions for Button Bar list box. Use

the up and down arrows to put the actions into the proper order for

display.

6. Click Save and Exit.

Test Configurable User Actions in CA Clarity PPM

To test the user actions in CA Clarity PPM, add the grid portlet to a page, then

open the page in CA Clarity PPM.

To quickly test the grid portlet and its configurable user actions in CA Clarity

PPM, you can add the grid portlet to your Overview page.

See the CA Clarity PPM Common Features and Personal Options guide for more

details on the Overview page.

Page 217: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Delete Filter Portlets

Chapter 4: Portlets: Grids, Graphs, Pages, and Menus 217

Delete Filter Portlets

When you delete a filter portlet, it is removed from any portlet pages where it

is published. If a filter portlet is the default filter for the page, deleting the

filter has the following effect on remaining filters:

■ If other filter portlets are present on the page, the default filter values are

inherited by the one published to the page at the earliest date.

■ If no other filter portlets exist on the page, the page no longer has a page

filter default and the system defaults of grid or graph portlets present are

used when the page is initially rendered.

To delete a filter portlet

1. Click Portlets from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Portlets page appears.

2. Check the box beside the name of the filter portlet you want to delete.

3. Click Delete.

Page 218: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits
Page 219: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 5: UI Themes 219

Chapter 5: UI Themes

UI themes determine the look and feel of CA Clarity PPM pages. This section

provides examples of the stock UI themes that ship with CA Clarity PPM.

With UI themes, you can change the color, log in information, branding, and

other aspects of the user interface. You can also create a custom UI theme to

display in CA Clarity PPM.

This section contains the following topics:

Select UI Themes (see page 220)

Create Custom UI Themes (see page 221)

Change the CA Clarity PPM Login Image (see page 224)

Change the Application Logo Image (see page 224)

Change the Background Tiling Image (see page 225)

Change Tab and Section Styles (see page 226)

Customize Graphs (see page 228)

Customize the Column Header in the Calendar (see page 231)

Distribute Custom Themes to Servers in the Cluster (see page 231)

Register New Themes (see page 232)

Page 220: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Select UI Themes

220 Studio Developer's Guide

Select UI Themes

Use this procedure to change the current CA Clarity PPM UI to one of the

available color schemes that comes with CA Clarity PPM. Once you complete

this procedure, all CA Clarity PPM users see the UI in the selected color.

To select a CA Clarity PPM UI theme

1. Select UI Themes from the Studio menu.

The UI Themes page appears.

2. Select one of the following color schemes:

■ Default

■ Orange

■ Yellow

■ Green

■ Blue Tan

■ Web Safe. This theme uses Web-safe colors for the main colors,

however gradients on corners are not Web safe.

3. Click Apply.

The UI theme is applied.

Page 221: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Create Custom UI Themes

Chapter 5: UI Themes 221

Create Custom UI Themes

You can create a custom UI theme by backing up and then replacing the

original CA Clarity PPM UI images in with new ones that are the same

dimensions. It is important that you use the original image file names so that

your customized images automatically display in the CA Clarity PPM UI. You

can also change the cascading style sheets to change the font and other

display characteristics of CA Clarity PPM pages.

The <CA Clarity PPM home>/webroot/ui/themes/ directory contains several

subdirectories of UI themes. Inside each of these subdirectories is a

ThemePreview.gif that shows you how the UI theme files in that directory will

appear.

Note: If you customize the default UI and you have a cluster of CA Clarity PPM

servers, you must distribute the changed files to all servers in the cluster.

To create a custom theme, you should have a good understanding of cascading

style sheets. To create the section headers with rounded edges, you should

also be proficient with a graphic editing tool.

Note: Contact CA Technology Services (CATS) for assistance on creating

custom UI themes.

To create a custom UI theme

1. Open the CA Clarity application server, and create a new directory where

you can save the stock UI theme files.

Example:

CA Clarity PPM/webroot/ui/themes/backup

2. Copy the files in the CA Clarity PPM home>/webroot/ui/themes/default

directory into the directory you created.

3. Find an existing UI that most closely matches your desired theme.

Check the ThemePreview.gif file in each <CA Clarity PPM

home>/webroot/ui/themes/ subdirectory for examples of available UI

themes.

4. Copy the directory that contains the UI theme you prefer into the /default

directory.

Note: Make sure you preserve the existing directory structure including all

sub-directories and files in those sub-directories. For example:

copy CA Clarity PPM/webroot/ui/themes/blue-dark

CA Clarity PPM/webroot/ui/themes/default/

5. Use a graphic editor and change the UI images as desired.

Page 222: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Create Custom UI Themes

222 Studio Developer's Guide

Important! You can create new images also, but your new images must

be the same size and filename as the ones you replace. If not, the integrity

of your new CA Clarity PPM interface is compromised.

6. Change the cascading style sheet in the <CA Clarity

PPM/webroot/ui/themes/default/css directory to change fonts, link colors,

and other attributes:

Note: You can change the CSS styles but not the style names.

UI Item CSS Styles

Header .pageHeaderContent{background-color:#000}

.pageHeaderText{color:#FFF}

a.pageHeaderLink:Visited,a.pageHeaderLink:Link{color:#FFF

}

Footer .pageFooterContent{background-color:#507298;color:#FFF}

.pageFooterLink{color:#FFF}

Inactive

menu

(disabled

menus)

.menu{}

table.menu td.menuTopLeftCorner

{height:10px;font-size:1px;}

table.menu td.menuLeftBorder {height:1px;font-size:1px;}

table.menu td.menuBottomLeftCorner

{height:10px;font-size:1px;}

table.menu a.menuItem:visited,

a.menuItem:link{width:100%;font-family: Arial, Helvetica,

sans-serif;font-size: 12px;color:

#232323;text-decoration:none;}

.table.menu td{padding-right:13px;}

Inactive

menu

(Cont.)

table.menu td.menuTopBorder{height:10px;font-size:1px;}

table.menu

td.menuBottomBorder{height:10px;font-size:1px;}

table.menu td.menu {color:

#4B4B4B;font-weight:bold;font-family: Arial, Helvetica,

sans-serif;font-size: 13px;width:100%;}

table.menu td.menuDivider{background-image:

url(../images/MenuDivider.gif); background-position: right;

font-size:1px;height:5px;}

table.menu td.menuItemDivider{background-image:

url(../images/MenuItemDivider.gif); background-position:

right; font-size:1px;height:5px;}

Page 223: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Create Custom UI Themes

Chapter 5: UI Themes 223

UI Item CSS Styles

Active menu

(enabled

menu items)

.menuOn{background-image:

url(../images/MenuTileSel.gif); background-position: right;}

table.menuOn td.menuTopLeftCorner

{height:10px;font-size:1px;background-image:

url(../images/MenuTopLeftCornerSel.gif); }

table.menuOn td.menuLeftBorder

{height:1px;font-size:1px;background-image:

url(../images/MenuLeftBorderSel.gif); }

table.menuOn td.menuBottomLeftCorner

{height:10px;font-size:1px;background-image:

url(../images/MenuBottomLeftCornerSel.gif); }

table.menuOn a.menuItem:visited,

a.menuItem:link{width:100%;font-family: Arial, Helvetica,

sans-serif; font-size: 12px;color:

#232323;text-decoration:none;}

table.menuOn a.menuItem:hover{font-family: Arial,

Helvetica, sans-serif; font-size:

12px;color:#000;text-decoration: underline;}

a.menuItemOn:visited, a.menuItemOn:link {font-family:

Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;font-weight:bold;font-size:

12px;color: #000 !important;text-decoration:none; width:

100%; }

a.menuItemOn:hover {text-decoration:underline;}

table.menuOn td{padding-right: 13px;}

table.menuOn td.menuTopBorder{height:10px;

background-image:

url(../images/MenuTopBorderSel.gif);font-size:1px;

background-position: right;width:100%; }

Active menu

(Cont.)

table.menuOn td.menuBottomBorder{height:10px;

background-image:

url(../images/MenuBottomBorderSel.gif);font-size:1px;

background-position: right;width:100%;}

table.menuOn td.menu {color: #4B4B4B;

font-weight:bold;font-family: Arial, Helvetica,

sans-serif;font-size: 13px;width:100%;}

table.menuOn td.menuDivider{background-image:

url(../images/MenuDividerSel.gif); background-position:

right; font-size:1px;height:5px;}

table.menuOn td.menuItemDivider{background-image:

url(../images/MenuItemDividerSel.gif); background-position:

right;font-size:1px;height:5px;}

Page 224: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Change the CA Clarity PPM Login Image

224 Studio Developer's Guide

7. Save your changes and close the file.

8. Display any CA Clarity PPM page to see the results. If the files you

modified are not the currently-selected UI theme, select and apply another

UI theme.

Change the CA Clarity PPM Login Image

You can replace the image that displays on CA Clarity PPM's Login page with

an GIF image of your choice that is 913 x 508 pixels.

To replace the CA Clarity PPM login image

1. Open the CA Clarity application server, and create a new directory where

you can save the stock login file. For example:

<CA Clarity PPM home>/webroot/ui/themes/backupLogin

2. Copy the stock login files from the <CA Clarity PPM

home>/webroot/ui/themes/default/images directory into the directory you

created.

3. Name your new login image Login.gif.

4. Place your new login image in the <CA Clarity PPM

home>/webroot/ui/themes/default/images directory.

5. Check your work by navigating to the CA Clarity PPM login page.

Change the Application Logo Image

The CA Clarity PPM logo (brand image) appears on the top left corner of the

screen when you have CA Clarity PPM open. You can replace the logo with a

different logo that is in GIF format and is 160W x 60H pixels in size.

Important! Do not change the style settings for this image in the

DefaultScreen.css file. It must remain a non-tiling background image that is

aligned at the bottom left.

Page 225: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Change the Background Tiling Image

Chapter 5: UI Themes 225

To change the logo

1. Log in to CA Clarity System Administration and create a new directory

where you can save the logo file. For example:

<CA Clarity PPM home>/webroot/ui/themes/backupLogo

2. Copy the logo file from the <CA Clarity PPM

home>/webroot/ui/themes/default/images directory into the directory you

created in Step 1.

For example:

copy c:/<CA Clarity PPM home>/webroot/ui/default/themes/images/brand.gif

c:/<CA Clarity PPM home>/webroot/ui/themes/backupLogo

3. Name your new logo image brand.gif.

4. Place your new login image in the <CA Clarity PPM

home>/webroot/ui/themes/default/images directory.

5. Check your work; display any CA Clarity PPM page.

Change the Background Tiling Image

When CA Clarity PPM pages are scaled to large sizes, the background image is

tiled (repeated) horizontally and vertically to fill the extra space. You can

change this image to one that meets the following specifications:

■ GIF format

■ 100W x 80H pixels

■ A watermark or transparent image

To achieve a look that is similar to the default, use a transparent GIF with a

white font.

To replace the background image file

1. Log in to CA Clarity System Administration and create a new directory

where you can save the CA Clarity PPM logo file. For example:

<clarity home>/webroot/ui/themes/backupBackground

2. Copy the original background image from the <clarity

home>/webroot/ui/themes/default/images directory into the directory you

created in Step 1.

For example:

copy <clarity home>/webroot/ui/default/themes/BrandTile.gif

<clarity home>/webroot/ui/themes/backupBackground

Page 226: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Change Tab and Section Styles

226 Studio Developer's Guide

3. Name your new background image BrandTile.gif.

4. Place your new background image in the <clarity

home>/webroot/ui/themes/default/images directory.

5. Check your work navigate in any CA Clarity PPM page.

Change Tab and Section Styles

You can change the appearance of tabs, subtabs, and sections in CA Clarity

PPM. Each tab and section is built using three background images; one for the

left side, one for the middle, one for the right. Fonts and font style are defined

in CSS styles. You can change the font, font size, color, and the URL that

displays when the user selects them.

To change table and submenus

1. Use a text editor to open the Theme.css file.

2. Change any of the following tab styles:

Visited links

a.tabLink:Visited,a.tabLink:Link{color:#333}

Hover color

a.tabLink:Hover{color:#000}

Selected tab

a.selTabLink:Visited,a.selTabLink:Link{color:#FFF}

.selTabBack{background-image:url(../images/SelTabBack.gif);}

.selTabLeftCap{background-image:url(../images/SelTabLeftCap.gif);}

.selTabRightCap{background-image:url(../images/SelTabRightCap.gif);}

.tabBack{background-image:url(../images/TabBack.gif);}

.tabLeftCap{background-image:url(../images/TabLeftCap.gif);}

.tabRightCap{background-image:url(../images/TabRightCap.gif);

Page 227: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Change Tab and Section Styles

Chapter 5: UI Themes 227

3. Change any of the following subtab styles:

Tab bar

.subTabBar{background-color:#7C8B77;color:#FFF}

Tab visited link

a.tabLink:Hover{color:#000}

Selected tab

a.subTabLink:Visited,a.subTabLink:Link{color:#FFF}

Tab hover color

a.subTabLink:Hover{color:#000}

Tab selected link

a.subTabLinkSel:Visited,a.subTabLinkSel:Link{color:#FFF;font-weight:

bold}

4. Change any of the following section titles styles:

Bar background color

.sectionTitleBarBack{background-image:url(../images/SectionBarBack.

gif);}

Title bar left cap

.sectionTitleBarLeftCap{background-image:url(../images/SectionBarLef

tCap.gif);}

Title bar right cap

.sectionTitleBarRightCap{background-image:url(../images/SectionBarR

ightCap.gif);}

Page 228: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Customize Graphs

228 Studio Developer's Guide

5. Check your work; display any CA Clarity PPM application page. If the files

you modified are not the currently-selected UI theme, to change themes.

6. Change any of the following section styles (.sectionBarBack changes the

background color of the entire section; a.button:Visited and

a.button:Link change the background of the buttons):

Section bar background

.sectionBarBack{background-color:#D7DEE1;color:#666}

Section bar button visited link

a.sectionBarBtn:Visited,a.sectionBarBtn:Link{color:#000}

Section bar visited link

a.sectionBarLink:Visited,a.sectionBarLink:Link{color:#000}

Section gradient button color

a.button:Visited,a.button:Link{background-image:url(../images/Button

Gradient.gif)}

7. Save your changes and close the file.

8. Check your work and display any CA Clarity PPM page.

Customize Graphs

You can change the look of graph titles and legends.

Page 229: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Customize Graphs

Chapter 5: UI Themes 229

To change graph styles

1. Use an editor to open the DefaultScreen.css file.

2. Change any of the graph styles.

The graph title

.graphTitleBox{ fill:#768572; }

The graph content box

.graphContentBox { fill:#ADB5AB; }

The graph legend text color

.graphLegendBox { fill:#D0D0D0; }

The graph text color

.graphText{ fill: #000; }

Graph item text

.graphItem0 { fill:#000000; }

.graphItem1 { fill:#DD0000; }

.graphItem2 { fill:#2F98D3; }

.graphItem3 { fill:#50B238; }

.graphItem4 { fill:#897FC6; }

.graphItem5 { fill:#FFCC00; }

.graphItem6 { fill:#EF8A8A; }

.graphItem7 { fill:#9ACDEA; }

.graphItem8 { fill:#ACDAA0; }

.graphItem9 { fill:#C9C5E5; }

.graphItem10 { fill:#FFE786; }

.graphItem11 { fill:#9F3535; }

.graphItem12 { fill:#4B7F9C; }

.graphItem13 { fill:#5B8B50; }

.graphItem14 { fill:#777294; }

.graphItem15 { fill:#B09735; }

Graph lines

.graphLine0 { stroke:#000000; }

.graphLine1 { stroke:#DD0000; }

.graphLine2 { stroke:#2F98D3; }

Page 230: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Customize Graphs

230 Studio Developer's Guide

.graphLine3 { stroke:#50B238; }

.graphLine4 { stroke:#897FC6; }

.graphLine5 { stroke:#FFCC00; }

.graphLine6 { stroke:#EF8A8A; }

.graphLine7 { stroke:#9ACDEA; }

.graphLine8 { stroke:#ACDAA0; }

.graphLine9 { stroke:#C9C5E5; }

.graphLine10 { stroke:#FFE786; }

.graphLine11 { stroke:#9F3535; }

.graphLine12 { stroke:#4B7F9C; }

.graphLine13 { stroke:#5B8B50; }

.graphLine14 { stroke:#777294; }

.graphLine15 { stroke:#B09735; }

3. Save your changes and close the file.

4. Check your work and display any CA Clarity PPM graph.

Page 231: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Customize the Column Header in the Calendar

Chapter 5: UI Themes 231

Customize the Column Header in the Calendar

The calendar in CA Clarity PPM uses a different style for the column headers to

convey the look of a calendar. In the default themes, the background uses the

same color as toolbar01. Toolbar03 is used for the mini-calendar.

To modify the column header in the calendar

1. Use an editor to open the DefaultScreen.css file.

2. Change any of the following styles:

Months color

tr.calMonthBar .calMonths { background-color:#A4ADA0; color:

#000000;}

Day color

tr.calMonthBar .calMonthsToday { background-color:#A4ADA0; color:

#000000;}

Calendar background

.toolbar01{background-color:#A7B3BE;color:#000;border-top:1px

solid #D3D8DE;border-bottom:1px solid #798A9C}

Mini-calendar color

.toolbar03{color:#000000;background-color:#A4ADA0;}

3. Save your changes and close the file.

4. Check your work and display any CA Clarity PPM calendar.

If the files you modified are not the currently-selected UI theme, change

themes.

Distribute Custom Themes to Servers in the Cluster

To distribute updated UI theme files to servers in the cluster

1. Log in to CA Clarity System Administration, and click Distribute Themes

from the Distribution menu.

The Distribute Themes page appears.

2. Select the desired servers and click Distribute.

A status window appears that shows the servers to which files are being

distributed. When all servers are updated, the status window automatically

closes.

Page 232: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Register New Themes

232 Studio Developer's Guide

Register New Themes

Before a custom theme can display on the UI Themes page so that you can

select it, you must register it in CA Clarity PPM.

To register a new theme in CA Clarity PPM

1. Select UI Themes from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The UI Themes page appears.

2. Under Customer-defined Themes, click Add.

3. At Name, enter the name of the CSS file that contains the new UI theme.

4. At Folder Name, enter the directory that contains the new theme. For

example:

ourCorp

5. Click Submit.

You can also choose this as the default UI theme.

Page 233: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 6: NSQL 233

Chapter 6: NSQL

Before you can create a portlet to extract and display data in CA Clarity PPM,

you need to write a query that defines the data. The topics in this section

discuss the CA Clarity PPM data model and its primary database tables, and

how to build NSQL queries and lookups to extract data.

This section contains the following topics:

About NSQL Queries (see page 233)

About Queries (see page 244)

About Lookups (see page 247)

Hierarchical Queries (see page 249)

NSQL Troubleshooting and Tips (see page 250)

About NSQL Queries

NSQL queries are read-only operations; they do not change data, they only

retrieve it. Only SELECT statements that specify which rows and columns to

fetch from one or more tables are permitted. NSQL statements fail with an

error message if a statement does not start with SELECT. This means that

UPDATE, INSERT, and DELETE operations cannot be performed in NSQL. NSQL

should not used for reporting or for stored procedures. Anything in the

database can be used to call stored procedures.

When you define an NSQL query, you will identify the query segments and

then designate them as metric values, dimensions, dimension properties, or

parameters. All these terms, as well as the overall query definition process,

are described in this section.

With NSQL, you can access data in the CA Clarity PPM database and create

queries in Studio and use them to create new portlets. Since queries are not

directly associated with a single portlet, the same query can be used to

produce multiple portlets.

The NSQL Syntax

The main NSQL keywords are the same as standard SQL keywords and are

described in this section.

Page 234: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

234 Studio Developer's Guide

SELECT

The SELECT statement retrieves column data from tables. NSQL statements

fail with an error message when a query statement does not start with

SELECT.

FROM

The FROM clause is a standard SQL statement. It identifies the required tables

and includes tables that contain the fields in the SELECT statement lists as well

as any additional required tables.

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRJ:P.ID:ProjectID@,

@Select:DIM_PROP:IMPLIED:PRJ:P.Name:ProjectName@

FROM SRM_PROJECTS P

-------------------------------------------------------------

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRJ:SRM_PROJECTS.ID:ProjectID@,

@Select:DIM_PROP:IMPLIED:PRJ:SRM_Projects.Start:ProjectStart@,

@Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RES:R.Unique_Name:ResourceID@,

@Select:DIM_PROP:IMPLIED:RES:R.Full_Name:ResourceName@

FROM SRM_PROJECTS, SRM_RESOURCES, PRTEAM

Page 235: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 235

WHERE

The WHERE statement filters data returned by a query to be used on portlets.

NSQL follows the same syntax with one exception, each WHERE statement

must contain a @FILTER@ parameter.

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRJ:P.ID:ProjectID@,

@Select:DIM_PROP:IMPLIED:PRJ:P.Name:ProjectName@

FROM SRM_PROJECTS P

WHERE @FILTER@ AND P.Is_Active=1

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Select @ Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRJ:SRM_PROJECTS.ID:ProjectID@,

@Select:DIM_PROP:IMPLIED:PRJ:SRM_Projects.Start:ProjectStart@,

@ Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RES:R.Unique_Name:ResourceID@,

@Select:DIM_PROP:IMPLIED:RES:R.Full_Name:ResourceName@

FROM SRM_PROJECTS, SRM_RESOURCES, PRTEAM

WHERE

@FILTER@

AND SRM_PROJECTS.ID=PRTeam.prProjectID

AND SRM_RESOURCES.ID=PRTeam.prResourceID

XPATH (XML Parameter) Constuct

There is syntax construct that can be used in the WHERE clause that will allow

a portlet to retrieve a name-value pair from the XML page URL where a

user-defined portlet is placed. The construct is:

@where:param:xml:string:/data/id/@value@

The syntax construct is called an XPATH or XML Parameter construct. This

construct can only be used on a specific portlet instance type, not the General

portlet instance type. This construct expects the internal ID value to come

from the URL that is displaying the page that contains the portlet. Therefore,

the portlet must be created as a specific portlet instance type, such as the

Project object portlet instance type to be placed on one of the pages from the

project object. If you create and place a General portlet on a general page,

there will not be a specific internal ID value in the URL that displays the page

containing the portlet.

Note: The construct must be entered in lowercased letters

Example

The following example shows how an NSQL query would use the XPATH

construct. The example assumes a portlet is placed on the Project Dashboard.

In the example, "id" is the name of the parameter that appears in the Project

Dashboard that must be used for this particular query to filter the data.

Page 236: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

236 Studio Developer's Guide

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PROJECT:P.ID:PID@,

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PROJECT:P.UNIQUE_NAME:PNAME@,

@SELECT:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:COUNT(*):TEAM_COUNT:AGG@

FROM SRM_PROJECTS P,

PRTEAM T

WHERE P.ID = @where:param:xml:string:/data/id/@value@

AND P.ID = T.PRPROJECTID

AND @FILTER@

GROUP BY P.ID, P.UNIQUE_NAME

HAVING @HAVING_FILTER@

When using this construct, be sure that you understand the name-value pair

that you want to retrieve from the URL on the page where the portlet is

placed. If you do not specify the correct named parameter, the portlet will not

generate the expected result set.

GROUP BY and HAVING

The GROUP BY clause is typically used to combine database records with

identical values in a specified field into a single record, usually for the purposes

of calculating some sort of aggregate function. For example, to summarize all

hours for each role on each project, group data by project and then by role.

HAVING is typically used only when GROUP BY is used and when the purpose

is to filter data based on the fields that are being grouped. In NSQL, HAVING is

required whenever a metric is used. The syntax for the HAVING statement is

@HAVING_FILTER@.

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PROJECT:P.PROJECT_CODE:ProjID@,

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PROJECT:P.PROJECT_NAME:ProjName@,

@select:metric:user_def:implied:P.ACTUAL_HOURS:Actuals:agg@

FROM NBI_PROJECT_CURRENT_FACTS P

WHERE @FILTER@

HAVING @HAVING_FILTER

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PROJECT:C.MANAGER_LAST_NAME:MANAGER@,

@SELECT:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:SUM(C.ACT_HOURS):Actuals:AGG@,

FROM NBI_PROJECT_CURRENT_FACTS C

WHERE C.MANAGER_LAST_NAME is not null AND @FILTER@

GROUP BY C.MANAGER_LAST_NAME

HAVING @HAVING_FILTER@

NSQL Constructs

The constructs described in this section expand to become elements of an

NSQL query based on the Datamart and CA Clarity PPM operational model.

Page 237: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 237

OBS Dimensions

The following constructs simplify the OBS structure in NSQL:

■ @SELECT:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS:PROJECT or RESOURCE[:<name>]@

The PROJECT or RESOURCE element specifies if the OBS dimensions are

Project or Resource OBS assignments. This element is mandatory. This

statement expands to one or more columns to be used in the SELECT list

of the query, some of which comprise the OBS dimension and, potentially,

some which are properties of the OBS dimension.

■ @FROM:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS[:<name>]@

This expands to include one or more OBS tables needed in the query.

These tables have aliases that start with the string ―OBS_‖, therefore other

aliases in the query must not start with this string.

■ @WHERE:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS:F[:<name>]@

This expands to include criteria to be used in the WHERE clause of the

query. The element preceding ―F‖ is optional, supplied by the application

administrator, and is the table name or alias of the fact table used in the

query. The NSQL engine can produce the correct string for joining with the

OBS information in the fact table.

■ @GROUP_BY:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS[:<name>]@

This expands to the same values of the @SELECT…@ sibling but without

any column aliases. This way it can be used in the GROUP BY clause of the

query.

Security Joins

Some CA Clarity PPM entities enforce instance-level security for certain

objects. To slice queries based on the security information of the user that

executes the query, NSQL provides the following construct:

@WHERE:SECURITY:<entity type>:<entity id>]@

Where:

■ <entity type> is one of the following:

■ PROJECT

■ RESOURCE

■ <entity id> is the query expression that represents the primary key of the

entity. For example:

■ SRM_PROJECTS.ID

For example:

@WHERE:SECURITY:PROJECT:SRM.PROJECTS.ID@

Page 238: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

238 Studio Developer's Guide

User-Defined Constructs

All parts of the SELECT clause must use special NSQL syntax and be specified

with an NSQL @SELECT@ construct.

Data Types

The following data types are supported in NSQL, are valid only as part of the

Dimension, Properties, and Metrics columns, and cannot be used as

parameters:

■ IMPLIED indicates there is no need to further qualify a data type —

whatever the database contains is used. This data type is allowed only in

@SELECT…@ constructs since this is the only location from which the

NSQL engine can retrieve information about the data type.

■ MONEY (<currency column>) specifies that the value is a monetary

amount and that the currency is specified by the column alias in

parenthesis. The currency must also be part of the SELECT statement.

■ STRING specifies a basic string that cannot be manipulated.

■ INTEGER

■ FLOAT

■ DATE

Page 239: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 239

Dimensions

A dimension is a grouping of similar data elements from one or more tables.

For example, ―Project‖ may be one dimension and ―OBS‖ or ―Tasks‖ could be

other dimensions.

Dimensions are defined in the SELECT statement using specific syntax. First

you define a key value for the dimension, then you can define the other data

elements in the dimension.

For example:

Defining the Dimension Column

Each dimension must contain a definition for the dimension column. Typically,

this is the table‘s primary key, though that may not always be the case. Use

the following syntax to define a dimension column:

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:<Dimension>:<Table.Field>:<label>@

When defining dimensions:

■ Each statement must begin and end with the ―@‖ character.

■ Use IMPLIED if the data type does not need to be further quantified (than

what can be derived from the database).

■ <Dimension> is a user-defined name such as RES.

■ <Table.Field> is the table or alias name — a field provided by CA Clarity

PPM.

■ <label> is a user-defined name or the field that appears in the query.

■ The dimension should be comprised of unique values. If not, portlets based

on the query will not work as expected.

For example:

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:Project:SRM_PROJECTS.ID:ProjectID@

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRJ:P.ID:ProjectID@

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:MyDim:SRM_Projects.Name:ProjectName@

Select @Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRJ:SRM_PROJECTS.ID:ProjectID@

@Select:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RES:R.Unique_Name:ResourceID@

The following statement defines the resource dimension as the full name of the

resource:

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:R.FULL_NAME:RSRC@

Page 240: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

240 Studio Developer's Guide

The following construct defines the resource dimension as the primary key of

the resource table (SRM_RESOURCES). It is important that the dimension is

comprised of unique values. If not, portlets based on the query will not work

as expected.

■ R.ID is the actual column expression.

■ RSRC_RD is the alias the column receives.

The actual SQL for this NSQL expression is as follows:

SELECT R.ID RSRC_ID,

Defining the Dimension Properties Column

Once the dimension is defined, all other fields are referred to as dimension

properties. The syntax you use to define the dimension column is the same as

the one you will use to define the dimension properties column(s) with one

exception: instead of using ―DIM‖ after the select statement, you will use

―DIM_PROP‖.

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:<Dimension>:<Table.Field>:<label>@

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:<Dimension>:<Table.Field>:<label>@

When defining the Dimension Properties column:

■ Each statement begins and ends with the ―@‖ character.

■ Use IMPLIED if the data type does not need to be further quantified (than

what can be derived from the database).

■ <Dimension> must be the same Dimension name as for the Dimension

column

■ <Table.Field> is the Table or Alias name and field from CA Clarity PPM.

■ <label> is the user-defined name or the field that appears in the query.

SELECT @SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:<Dimension>:<Table.Field>:<label>@

Using the sample dimension statement from above, we add the names of the

resource and the Manager dimension properties, resulting in the following

example:

SELECT

@SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:R.ID:RSRC_ID@,

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:R.FULL_NAME:RSRC@,

@SELECT:DIM_PROP:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:RESOURCE:MR.FULL_NAME:MANAGER@

In the statement above, the unique name of the dimension is the same for the

three columns. This tells the NSQL engine that the three columns belong

together.

Page 241: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 241

The Metrics Column

A metric column is similar to a dimension property in that it belongs in the

SELECT section of the query, but metric column values can be totaled on a grid

or displayed as value(s) on the graph. Use the following syntax to define a

metric column:

@SELECT:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:<Table.Field>:<label>:agg@

When defining metric columns:

■ Each statement must begin and end with the ―@‖ character.

■ The keyword <METRIC> must be present (do not use the dimension name

since metrics cross dimensions).

■ Use IMPLIED if the data type does not need to be further quantified (than

what can be derived from the database).

■ <Table.Field> is the table or alias name — a field provided by CA Clarity

PPM.

■ <label> is a user-defined name or the field that appears in the query.

■ Use agg to allow the metric to be totaled when used in a grid.

For example:

@Select:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:NBI_PROJECT_CURRENT_FACTS.ACTUAL_HOURS:hrs:agg@

@Select:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRASSIGNMENT.PRACTSUM/3600:Actuals:agg@,

@Select:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PRASSIGNMENT.PRESTSUM/3600:ETC:agg@

@Select:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:Count(*):Project_Count:agg@

Specifying a metrics column (or columns) is very similar to specifying a

dimension. For example, to add the Project Count (the number of projects this

resource has created) metric to the example above:

@SELECT:METRIC:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:COUNT(*):PROJECT_COUNT[:AGG]@

The last segment of the metric SELECT syntax is optional and determines if the

column expression uses an aggregation function such as COUNT, AVG, SUM, or

is a plain column expression. This is required for Metric Column filters.

If the expression uses an aggregate function, the filter is part of the HAVING

clause of the query. Otherwise, it becomes part of the WHERE clause. Adding

this to the example presented above produces the following query:

SELECT R.ID RSRC_ID,

R.FULL_NAME RSRC,

MR.FULL_NAME MANAGER,

COUNT(*) PROJECT_COUNT

Page 242: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

242 Studio Developer's Guide

Parameters

Parameters are substitution variables that you use in a query to pass values.

Parameters only appear in the SELECT list and in the WHERE clause. There are

two kinds of parameters.

■ User-supplied parameters, which are used as filters in portlets and are

either based on the query or are fixed when the portlet is created.

User-supplied parameters are specified using the following syntax:

@SELECT:PARAM:USER_DEF:DATA_TYPE:PARAM_NAME[:ALIAS]@

or,

@WHERE:PARAM:USER_DEF:DATA_TYPE:PARAM_NAME@

Where:

DATA_TYPE is the data type for the parameter, and

PARAM_NAME is the unique identifier for the parameter.

■ Built-in parameters, which automatically take their values at run-time

based on the current user settings or system context. Built-in parameters

are specified using the following syntax:

@SELECT:PARAM:PARAM_IDENTIFIER[:ALIAS]@

or,

@WHERE:PARAM:PARAM_IDENTIFIER@

Where:

PARAM_IDENTIFIER is one of the following:

■ USER_ID

■ USER_NAME

■ LANGUAGE

■ LOCALE

Example

i.xdm_priority = prio.id and prio.language_code = @where:param:language@

and i.act_status = s.id and s.language_code = @where:param:language@

and i.xdm_impact = imp.id and imp.language_code = @where:param:language@

and i.xdm_issue_type = isstype.id and isstype.language_code = @where:param:language

Advanced NSQL Constructs

NSQL provides several special constructs to make building reports easier.

Constructs are available for the following types of data:

■ OBS

■ Calendar Time

■ Fiscal Time

■ Security

Page 243: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About NSQL Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 243

OBS

Use the OBS construct with Datamart tables to limit to an OBS unit level. In

the SELECT statement, you will specify if this is a Project or a Resource OBS.

In the WHERE statement, you will specify the Datamart table.

The syntax for OBS construct is:

@SELECT:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS:<Entity>@,

@FROM:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS@

@WHERE:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS:<Datamart Table>@

@GROUP_BY:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS@

<Entity> must be set to either PROJECT or RESOURCE

<Datamart Table> must be one of the datamart tables

Example

SELECT @SELECT:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS:PROJECT@,

@SELECT:DIM:USER_DEF:IMPLIED:PROJECT:P.PROJECT_CODE:ProjID@,

@select:metric:user_def:implied:Sum(P.ACTUAL_HOURS):Actuals:agg@,

@select:metric:user_def:IMPLIED:Sum(P.ETC_Hours):ETC:agg@

FROM NBI_PROJECT_CURRENT_FACTS P, @FROM:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS@

WHERE @FILTER@ AND @WHERE:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS:P@

GROUP BY @GROUP_BY:DIM:DATA_MART:OBS@, P.Project_Code

HAVING @HAVING_FILTER@

Calendar Time

Use the CALENDAR TIME construct with the following Datamart time tables to

show hours or costs across a time scale:

■ NBI_PM_PT_FACTS

■ NBI_PM_PROJECT_TIME_SUMMARY

■ NBI_RT_FACTS

■ NBI_RESOURCE_TIME_SUMMARY

The syntax for CALENDAR TIME construct is:

@SELECT:DIM:DATA_MART:CALENDAR_TIME@

@FROM:DIM:DATA_MART:CALENDAR_TIME@

@WHERE:DIM:DATA_MART:CALENDAR_TIME: <Datamart TIME Table>@

@GROUP_BY:DIM:DATA_MART:CALENDAR_TIME@

Page 244: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Queries

244 Studio Developer's Guide

Fiscal Time

Use the FISCAL TIME construct when dealing with fiscal periods:

@SELECT:DIM:DATA_MART:FISCAL_TIME[:<name>]@

@FROM:DIM:DATA_MART:FISCAL_TIME[:<name>]@

@WHERE:DIM:DATA_MART:FISCAL_TIME:F[:<name>]@

@GROUP_BY:DIM:DATA_MART:FISCAL_TIME[:<name>]@

Security

Projects or resources appear only in a grid or graph when a user has sufficient

access rights. Use SECURITY in the WHERE clause to verify the user‘s access

rights.

The syntax for Security construct is:

@WHERE:SECURITY:<entity type>:<entity id>@

When defining a Security construct:

■ Each statement begins and ends with the ―@‖ character.

■ WHERE, must appear in the WHERE section of the NSQL.

■ <entity type> is either PROJECT or RESOURCE.

■ <entity id> is the project or resource ID (for example, SRM_PROJECTS.ID

or NBI_PROJECT_CURRENT_FACTS.Project_ID).

About Queries

Before you can create a portlet in CA Clarity PPM, you need to write a query to

extract the data.

Page 245: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 245

Create Queries

This section shows you how to create a simple query. Studio provides a variety

of query templates to help you get started. Query templates are available for

the following types of data:

■ Collaboration

■ Project

■ Productivity

■ Resource

■ Business Intelligence

■ Framework

Each of the query templates specifies typical data elements for that type of

query. Once your query is created, you can use it to populate data in a portlet.

Important! If an NSQL query‘s SELECT statement includes too many columns

or aggregate functions at runtime, a system error occurs. The total amount of

actual data for sorting (plus the aggregates) cannot be greater than the

current database block size.

Use the Query Properties: General page to create new queries.

To create a new query

1. Select Queries from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Queries page appears.

2. Click New.

The Query Properties: General page appears.

3. Complete the following fields:

Query Name

Enter a name for the query.

Query ID

Enter a unique ID.

Content Source

Select a data source.

Category

Select the type of query you are creating. The choices that appear

depend upon the categories set by your CA Clarity PPM administrator.

Page 246: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Queries

246 Studio Developer's Guide

Description

Enter a description of the query.

4. Click Save and Continue.

5. Enter your NSQL into the query window.

6. Click Save and Continue.

7. Review the data to be included in the query and identify which of the

columns can be filtered, which are required, and which can be used as

lookups. Click Continue.

8. To define links to another table, click New and complete the following

fields:

Name

Enter a name for the link.

Link ID

Enter a unique ID for the link.

Description

Enter a description.

Action

Select a link (or destination) for the link.

Note: Links are predefined.

9. Enter a unique ID in the next field and click Submit.

Change Queries

If the query has not yet been associated with an object, you can use the

following procedure to change it.

To change a query

1. Click Queries from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Queries page appears.

2. Click the name of the query that you want to change.

The Query Properties: General page appears.

3. Select NSQL from the content menu.

The Query Properties: NSQL page appears.

4. Enter your changes.

5. Click Save.

Page 247: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Lookups

Chapter 6: NSQL 247

Delete Queries

You can delete queries that are not yet associated with a portlet.

To delete a query

1. Click Queries from the CA Clarity Studio menu.

The Queries page appears.

2. Check the box next to the query that you want to delete.

3. Click Delete, then click Yes.

About Lookups

You can use NSQL to create lookups that dynamically filter portlet data. Rather

than have a full-text field as a filter, you can create lookups as drop-down lists

and browse lists to filter portlet data. There are three types of lookups:

■ Static List, that consist of a standard set of choices. These are often used

as drop-downs or browse lists for reports, user-defined fields, and

user-defined XDM forms.

■ Static Dependent Lists, that provide two or more choices. Use this type of

lookup to create a hierarchy of lookups and values. Items that appear on

the second and subsequent selection lists depend upon choices previously

made by the user.

For example, if the user selects ―USA‖ from a country browse list, then a

state list may appear from which the user can select an appropriate state.

If the user selects ―Canada‖ in the country browse list, a list of provinces

appears in the second selection list.

■ Dynamic Queries, which fetch data from the CA Clarity PPM database in

realtime to populate the drop-down or browse lists. These lookups provide

the most up-to-date values possible.

The following example shows a dynamic query that returns a list of resources

and filters out all resources with a null user_id value. The result set will contain

resources with a user account to sign in to the application.

SELECT @SELECT:r.user_id:user_id@,

@SELECT:r.unique_name:unique_name@,

@SELECT:r.first_name:first_name@,

@SELECT:r.last_name:last_name@,

@SELECT:r.full_name:full_name@

FROM srm_resources r

WHERE r.user_id IS NOT NULL

AND @FILTER@

Note: See the Administration Guide for more information about lookups.

Page 248: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

About Lookups

248 Studio Developer's Guide

Browse-only Construct for Dynamic Query Lookups

For dynamic query lookups, browsing works in a specific way. When a record is

displayed in the application, the value does not appear in the lookup field

because there is no match between the value stored on the record and the list

value in the lookup. The old values are retained within the database table for

the instance record. However, if a record with the old value is retrieved and is

not seen in the application's display, clicking the Save or Submit button

removes the old value from the record.

To retain inactivated values in the record and see them in the application, you

must change the lookup query definition. For this case, the definition must

include the specific NSQL construct @BROWSE-ONLY. When a user uses the

lookup on new records, active values are displayed. And, when an existing

record is shown with inactive values, the inactive value remains on the record.

The syntax for this construct is :

@BROWSE-ONLY: /* include SQL statement here to look at active results only

*/ :BROWSE-ONLY@

The following example shows the BROWSE-ONLY construct with a value

included that defines the results that will be displayed.

SELECT ......

FROM .....

WHERE @FILTER@

@BROWSE-ONLY:

AND IS_ACTIVE = 1

:BROWSE-ONLY@

Page 249: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Hierarchical Queries

Chapter 6: NSQL 249

Hierarchical Queries

A hierarchical query is used to display values in a hierarchical grid portlet. A

hierarchical query is written using the same NSQL syntax as a regular query,

and all NSQL constructs are available for a hierarchical query. The following

items are specific for hierarchical queries:

■ A dimension property with a code of "hg_has_children." The property can

be of any data type but is usually number or string. It must be a unique

value for all rows in the dimension (or it can be NULL). A value at runtime

for this property signifies that the row has children and the row in the grid

will have the [+] icon rendered. A NULL value means the row does not

have children.

■ A parameter with a code of "hg_row_id." The parameter‘s data type must

match that of hg_has_children. This parameter means "the current row."

When a user clicks on the expand icon in the grid, the id of the expanded

row is passed into the query as this parameter. The value passed in is the

same value that was previously returned as hg_has_children. The following

rules must be followed when using this parameter:

■ When hg_row_id is null, you return only the top-level rows in the

hierarchy.

■ When hg_row_id has a value, you return only the "child" rows for that

row—immediate children only, no grandchildren, great grandchildren,

and so on.

Filtering in Hierarchical Queries

Filter values are passed into the hierarchical queries as they are for regular

queries. The standard CA Clarity PPM hierarchical grids return all ancestor rows

when a leaf row matches the filter criteria. For example, consider this simple

hierarchy:

North America

Canada

Ontario

Toronto

If you filter on name="Toronto," the query returns "North America," "Canada,"

"Ontario," and "Toronto," one level at a time. This allows you to expand

through the hierarchy to find the row(s) matching the filter criteria and still see

the data in a hierarchical format. Although it is not required, you can structure

a query to provide similar functionality.

Page 250: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

NSQL Troubleshooting and Tips

250 Studio Developer's Guide

NSQL Troubleshooting and Tips

The following errors can occur when you are working with NSQL:

■ This query produced duplicate dimensional data. The results shown here

may be invalid or incomplete.

The unique key in the Dimension property cannot contain duplicate values.

Make sure that the tables joins are correct.

■ Error when trying to execute the query.

Possible causes:

■ A field listed In the SELECT or WHERE clause does not specify the table

name. Because the field name appears in multiple tables, the table

name must precede the field name.

■ A comma after the last table listed in the FROM clause.

■ Incorrect table name.

Use the following tips to ensure NSQL successful queries:

■ When you create queries for use with pie charts and funnel charts, make

sure that the metric does not contain negative values by filtering all values

greater than zero.

■ NSQL adds SQL constructs to the end of the statement for automated

filtering and other statements. This can create problems when you use

UNION in NSQL. As a workaround, use the @SELECT@ in the outer select

of an inline view that encapsulates the UNION statement.

Page 251: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Chapter 7: CA Clarity PPM Tables 251

Chapter 7: CA Clarity PPM Tables

This section contains the following topics:

Introduction (see page 251)

Table Prefixes (see page 251)

The Core CA Clarity PPM Tables (see page 252)

Project Tables (see page 253)

Resource Tables (see page 254)

Time Slice Tables (see page 254)

Timesheet Tables (see page 256)

The Datamart Tables (see page 258)

XDM Forms Tables (see page 258)

Introduction

The basic unit of storage in a relational database management system, tables

represents entities and relationships, and consist of one or more units of

information (rows), each of which contains the same kinds of values

(columns). The CA Clarity PPM data model consists of several hundred tables

whose data you can query.

Note: To view the Entity Relationship Diagram for a table, see the CA Clarity

PPM Technical Reference Guide.

Table Prefixes

The prefix in the table name helps you identify tables and the data they

support.

Prefix Table Topic

BIZ Opportunities

CAL Events

CAP Capacity Planning

CLB Collaboration

CMN Common tables that span functionality

CMN_RPT Reporting

CMN_SEC Security

Page 252: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

The Core CA Clarity PPM Tables

252 Studio Developer's Guide

Prefix Table Topic

MR Methodology

NBI Datamart

NTD Discussions

OBS Organizational Breakdown Structure

PAC Project Accounting

PPA Project Billing

PR and PRJ Projects

RSM Resource management

SRM Main objects table that crosses functionality modules

TAX Tax

XDM eXtensible Data Model (XDM) for user-defined fields and

forms

The Core CA Clarity PPM Tables

CA Clarity PPM's data model is large and complex, but you will only need an

understanding of the core tables, which are discussed in this section.

Table Name Description

SRM_PROJECTS Contains the basic information for any

type of project.

SRM_RESOURCES Contains the basic information for any

type of resource or role.

NBI_PM_PROJECT_CURRENT_FA

CTS

Contains summary information about

each project.

NBI_PM_PT_FACTS For each defined calendar period, this

table lists the amount of hours or cost

for a day, week, month, quarter, or

year.

NBI_RT_FACTS Contains Summary information about

each resource by date.

NBI_DIM_OBS Contains OBS Unit information.

Page 253: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Project Tables

Chapter 7: CA Clarity PPM Tables 253

Project Tables

Table Name Description

SRM_PROJECTS Contains basic project information.

PRJ_Projects A record is created in this table when

management is enabled for a project.

PRTask Stores task information, details about phases,

activities, and milestones.

PRAssignment Contains work effort information for each

resource assigned to a task. Use this table to

access actuals, estimate to complete, and

baseline hours for a task. Use the Time Slice or

Datamart tables to access daily, weekly, and

monthly hours.

PRTeam Records are created in this table when a resource

is added to the Staff page. Use this table to

identify which resources are assigned to projects.

XDM_CDF_SRM_PROJE

CTS

The structure of this table depends on XDM

changes.

PRSubproject Contains program relationship, subproject

information, and inter-project dependency

information.

The sequence of a task in a project plan determines the phase or activity to

which the task belongs. All phases, activities, tasks, and milestones are stored

in PRTASK. PRWBSSEQUENCE determines the order in which they appear when

the plan is opened in Open Workbench. This makes reporting on summary

levels less complex than reporting on project or task levels. See following

descriptions of each summary level:

Name PRID WBS

Sequence

WBS

Level

PRISTASK

Phase A 5001 1 1 0

Activity A1 5002 2 2 0

Task A1 5003 3 3 -1

Task A2 5006 4 3 -1

Activity A2 5005 5 2 0

Task A3 5007 6 3 -1

Phase B 5009 7 1 0

Page 254: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Resource Tables

254 Studio Developer's Guide

Name PRID WBS

Sequence

WBS

Level

PRISTASK

Task B1 5010 8 2 -1

Activity B1 5011 9 2 0

Task B2 5012 10 3 0

Resource Tables

Table Name Description

SRM_RESOURCES This is the primary resource table that links

all related resource tables from the various

modules.

PRResource Contains project related information about

the resource.

RSM_SKILLS_ASSOCIATIONS Associates skills with resources.

RSM_SKILLS Stores information about all the skills in CA

Clarity PPM.

Time Slice Tables

A time slice is a standard, flat, time slice table that contains data written from

a sliced Binary Large Object (BLOB), a collection of binary data that is stored

as a single entity in a database. CA Clarity PPM uses BLOBs to store curve and

calendar data.

In CA Clarity PPM, the application administrator determines which BLOBs that

are used and the frequency with which this is done. BLOB cracking runs as a

continual background process.

See following a list of the CA Clarity PPM BLOBs that require cracking:

Source Table BLOB Description

PRAssignment prActCurve Actuals posted to an assignment.

PRAssignment prEstCurve Assignment estimates.

PRAssignment prBaseCur

ve

Assignment baselines.

PRCalendar prValue Resource availability information, such as

Page 255: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Time Slice Tables

Chapter 7: CA Clarity PPM Tables 255

Source Table BLOB Description

shifts, days off, and holidays.

PRResource prAvailCur

ve

The resource's availability.

PRTeam prAlloCurv

e

Percentage of the resource's availability that

is allocated to a project (as rate curve).

Link Time Slice Tables

CA Clarity PPM Time Slicing stores the data in two tables:

■ PRJ_BLB_SliceRequests

■ PRJ_BLB_Slices

You can create as many slice requests to slice the blobs into daily, weekly,

monthly, or yearly slices. You can create different slices for Availability,

Actuals, Baseline, and Estimate to Complete. Ideally for reporting you want to

create three daily slices: one for Actuals, Estimate to Complete, and Baseline.

Note: See the Technical Reference Guide for more information on the column

names and descriptions in the tables named PRJ_BLB_SLICEREQUESTS and

PRJ_BLB_SLICES.

Since PRJ_BLB_Slices contain all hours for Actuals, ETC, and Baseline, create

three queries to separate the values. The three queries take the place of the

PRAssignment table in the existing reports. The sample query below displays

how to create one such query to get daily actuals.

The corresponding SQL is:

SELECT PRJ_BLB_SLICEREQUESTS.REQUEST_NAME, PRJ_BLB_SLICES.SLICE_REQUEST_ID,

PRJ_BLB_SLICES.PRJ_OBJECT_ID, PRJ_BLB_SLICES.UNIT, PRJ_BLB_SLICES.SLICE_DATE,

PRJ_BLB_SLICES.SLICE

FROM PRJ_BLB_SLICEREQUESTS INNER JOIN PRJ_BLB_SLICES ON

PRJ_BLB_SLICEREQUESTS.ID = PRJ_BLB_SLICES.SLICE_REQUEST_ID

WHERE (((PRJ_BLB_SLICEREQUESTS.REQUEST_NAME) Like “DAILYRESOURCEACTCURVE”));

The field descriptions are:

Request_Name

Name of the Time Slice.

Slice_Request_ID

Internal ID of the Time Slice request.

Page 256: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Timesheet Tables

256 Studio Developer's Guide

PRJ_Object_ID

In the example above, this field maps to the following field:

[PRAssignment]|[PRID]

Unit

0=HOURS

Slice_Date

Day on which the hours occur.

Slice

The amount of time on that day.

Link Time Slice Queries to PRAssignment

After you create the three time slice queries (Daily ETC, Daily Actuals, and

Daily Baseline in the following example), modify each of the queries that call

for daily, weekly, or monthly hours and connect the three time slice queries to

PRAssignment as shown in the sample below.

Field Name Description

PRJ_BLB_SLICEREQUESTS Lists the Time Slice Requests not the hours

associated with them. Use this table to link

to PRJ_BLB_SLICES to report on daily,

weekly, or monthly hours.

PRJ_BLB_SLICES Contains the daily, weekly, and monthly

hours depending on the Time Requests

created.

Timesheet Tables

Field Name Description

PRTIMEPERIOD Contains a list of the available time tracking

periods.

PRTIMESHEET Stores the status of the timesheet and provides a

link to the PRTIMEENTRY table for the actual hours

on the timesheet.

PRTIMEENTRY Contains both direct and indirect time (for

example,. Below the line) that is entered on a

timesheet.

Page 257: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Timesheet Tables

Chapter 7: CA Clarity PPM Tables 257

Field Name Description

PRCHARGECODE Contains the list of Charge Codes used for both

Direct and Indirect time entry on a timesheet.

PRTYPECODE Contains the list of Type Codes used for Direct

time entry only on a timesheet.

Timesheet Reporting Considerations

The PRTYPECODE and PRCHARGECODE tables can be excluded if Type Codes

and Charge Codes are not being used. Charge codes are sometimes used to

track indirect time charges such as vacation, sick days, etc. These hours are

stored in PRTIMEENTRY and can be identified by filtering for:

PRASSIGNMENTID= Null

If Adjustment timesheets are included, data duplication can occur. To avoid

duplication, filter out Timesheets that have a status of Adjusted:

PRSTATUS <5

Adjustment Timesheets

A timesheet is for a given period (as indicated by PRTIMEPERIODID). If the

timesheet has been posted in another Period (as indicated by

PRPOSTEDPERIODID) the timesheet:

■ May have been adjusted (as indicated by a reference in PRADJUSTMENTID)

back to the parent Timesheet, or

■ May not have been submitted (in this case select PRSTATUS).

When a timesheet is adjusted, PRSTATUS is set to 5 and the timesheet that

replaced it contains the original timesheet's ID in PRADJUSTEDID.

Page 258: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

The Datamart Tables

258 Studio Developer's Guide

The Datamart Tables

The Datamart extracts project management, financial management and

resource management data from CA Clarity PPM into easy-to-report-on flat

reporting tables. Once data for a project or resource has been extracted into

the Datamart, the data for that project or resource is refreshed during

subsequent Datamart extractions.

The Datamart delivers a number of out-of-the box, high-performance reports.

Most of the reports are based on the Datamart and provide excellent

performance due to reduced query complexity and flattened table structures. A

Datamart Extraction job runs daily to extract data from the transactional

database tables and stores them in easily understood reporting tables.

The Datamart consists of the following:

■ A collection of data points that pertain to projects and resources.

■ Data organized by easy-to-report on ―flat‖ tables organized by fiscal

period, calendar periods, and organizational break down structures (OBS).

■ Data aggregated and stored in an easily understood set of ―roll-up‖ tables.

These tables are also organized by fiscal period, calendar periods, and by

organizational break down structures (OBS).

■ Configuration and set-up options to configure the Datamart.

■ Support for alerting, or stop-lighting, and trending analysis.

Note: For more detailed information on the Datamart tables and views, see

the CA Clarity PPM Technical Reference Guide and the CA Clarity PPM

Administration Guide.

XDM Forms Tables

Field Name Description

CLB_DMS_FOLDERS Holds all attributes related to Document Manager.

XDM_ACT_* Each XDM form contains a table with the prefix of

XDM_ACT_.

Page 259: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Index 259

Index

A

access • 42

access rights

in partitions • 23

access, restricting • 210

activating objects, event enabling • 41

add-ins

applying • 95

described • 95

admin page template • 203

application page template • 203

attributes

about the object attribute • 84

deleting • 90

description • 73

parameters • 72

audit trail • 92

auto-numbering

creating schemes • 85

deactivating • 89

modifying schemes • 88

using with partitions • 84

B

boolean fields • 57

BPL--hierarchies (Studio) • 34

C

calculated attributes

building the calculation • 79

creating • 77

example • 81

functions • 74

testing • 84

colors

displaying boolean fields as icons • 57

displaying formula fields in • 52

displaying money fields in • 55

displaying number fields in • 48

configurable user actions

basic steps for adding • 214

description • 213

NSQL query for • 214

selecting for grid portlet • 216

core tables

npt.filterPortletProperties • 188

SRM_PROJECTS • 253

currency codes • 55

D

data providers • 161

data types

adding attributes to • 45

supported in CA Clarity PPM • 45

Datamart tables • 251

date fields

adding to objects • 61

displaying • 61

display mappings • 130

displaying • 171

F

field data types • 43

attachments • 43

boolean • 43

dates • 43

dynamic queries • 43

formulas • 43

large strings • 43

lookups • 43

money • 43

multi-valued lookups • 43

numbers • 43

static dependent lists • 43

strings • 43

time-varying • 43

field values

displaying as color or icon • 133

highlighting range of • 133

fields

changing appearance • 130

changing labels • 133

changing properties • 130

for column or bar graphs • 141

representing number fields • 48

filter portlets

adding • 217

adding Boolean fields • 194

adding date fields • 196

adding lookup fields • 197

Page 260: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

260 Studio Developer's Guide

adding money fields • 193

adding number fields • 191

adding string fields • 189

adding URL fields • 200

basic setup steps • 188

creating • 188

deleting • 217

descriptions • 185

layout • 201

persistence • 187

precedence • 186

scope • 187

viewing • 201

fiscal time • 244

formula fields, adding • 52

G

Gantt fields, adding • 126

graph portlets

appearance • 161, 166, 173

changing • 173

creating • 164

data display • 161, 171, 173

deleting • 161, 173

dimensions • 162

graph types • 162

graphs

bar • 162

bubble • 162

column • 162

funnel • 162

line • 162

metrics • 162

pie • 162

grid portlets

access rights • 174

changing • 174, 180

comparison • 174

considerations • 174, 175, 176

creating • 176

deleting • 174, 181

layout • 174, 178, 180

mouseover text • 178

using • 174

variance • 174

guidelines • 166

H

HTML portlets

about • 181

changing • 181, 183

creating • 182

deleting • 181, 184

I

icons

displaying boolean fields as • 57

displaying formula fields as • 52

displaying money fields as • 55

image fields • 126

individuals, access to • 42

L

legends, graph portlets • 166

linking • 255

links • 123

list column • 96

list column views

adding fields • 99

adding image fields • 126

adding to • 128

highlighting in • 99

modifying • 136

multiple-time varying • 103

setting up in • 99

sorting in • 96, 104

list filter views

modifying • 139

setting up in • 97

lookups

about • 247

displaying fields • 63

partitioned • 22

static list • 43

M

markers, adding legends • 166

master objects, designating • 41

menus

changing • 144

creating links • 144

money fields, displaying • 55

mouseover • 126

multi-valued lookup fields, displaying • 66

N

NSQL

calendar time • 242, 243

Page 261: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

Index 261

constructs • 236, 237, 238

data types • 238

DATE • 238

defining the metrics column • 237, 241

dimensions • 237, 239

fiscal time • 244

FLOAT statement • 238

FROM statement • 234

GROUP BY command • 236

HAVING command • 236

IMPLIED • 238

INTEGER • 238

MONEY • 238

OBS construct • 242, 243

OBS dimensions • 236, 237

parameters • 242

queries • 233

SELECT command • 234

SQL • 233

STRING • 238

syntax • 233

troubleshooting • 250

WHERE statement • 235

number fields, adding • 48

O

objects

adding fields to • 45

applying partition models to • 29

child • 34

copy enabling • 41

creating new • 41

deleting • 94

described • 34

granting access to • 42

process overview • 34

resetting views • 115

P

partition models

about • 21

adding partitions to • 27

adding to • 26

creating • 25

partitioned data providers • 22

partitions

adding to partitions • 28

basic guidelines • 24

creating and using • 24

hierarchies • 21

hierarchies and partitions • 34

how they work • 20

parent • 26, 27

partitioned data providers • 22

process overview • 24

relationship to object views • 22

using • 19

pop-up page template • 203

portlet pages

adding to • 206

creating • 202, 203

deleting • 208

portlets

deploying content • 180, 202, 216

graphs • 161

hierarchical grid • 175

portlet pages • 210

publishing • 209

restricting access • 180, 209

restricting portlet configuration • 211

types • 152

portlets and pages, accessing • 209

power filters • 97

PowerMods, configuration • 34

progress bar fields • 129

project tables

about • 253

PRAssignment • 253

PRJ_Projects • 253

PRSubproject • 253

PRTask • 253

PRTeam • 253

properties views

about • 96

adding to object views • 97

fields • 134

Q

queries

changing • 244, 246

deleting • 247

described • 244

R

resource tables • 251

S

scatter graphs • 162

Page 262: CA Clarity Project & Portfolio Manager · configurations, your CA Clarity PPM configurations automatically carry forward to future versions of the product. Studio Features and Benefits

262 Studio Developer's Guide

secondary values • 99

sections

adding • 144

changing • 145

deleting • 147

moving • 146

selecting UI theme • 26

static lookups

partitions • 22

user-defined • 22

stock icons • 148

stock objects

baseline • 40

string fields

adding large • 46

adding to objects • 46

Studio • 17

subobjects • 41

subpages

about • 123

about the Display Condition Builder • 110

adding • 107

System Partition • 20

system types

booking status list • 40

investments • 40

key tasks • 40

organizer tasks • 40

portfolios • 40

T

time slice tables

about • 254

BLOBs • 254

linking • 255

timesheet reporting • 257

U

user-defined fields

creating • 45

maximum allowed number • 45

user-defined objects • 34

V

views

described • 96

list filter • 96

publishing • 113

virtual fields • 99

W

weighted average • 52

word wrapping

bar graphs • 141

column graphs • 141

enabling • 141

X

XDM

about • 251

database tables • 251, 258

XDM_CDF_SRM_PROJECTS • 253